JP2008110050A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can suppress fall of interests in games. <P>SOLUTION: In the game machine, game balls are allowed to enter a special pattern starter slot 82 only when a second mobile piece 81 is operated to open or close according to the entry of the game balls into the normal pattern start slot 96. When the game balls enter the special pattern start slot 82, a lottery processing is carried out to guarantee the winning of any of the jackpot and winning combinations. The shift is made to the time shortening state after the jackpot is carried out according to the result of the lottery processing. The time shortening state is continued until the second mobile piece 81 is operated to open or close up to the predetermined frequency. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2008,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a so-called first type gaming machine or a second type gaming machine is known.

  Here, with the first type of gaming machine (digipachi gaming machine), a big win is won in a lottery process (internal lottery) performed by an internal microcomputer triggered by a game ball entering the starting port. This is a gaming machine to which a special game advantageous to the player is given.

  Therefore, in this digipachi gaming machine, the player first operates the handle so that the game ball can be received in the starting port. As a result, when a game ball is received at the starting port, a lottery process for winning a jackpot that triggers the execution of the special game is performed with a predetermined winning probability. Further, as a result of the lottery process, when the jackpot is won, a special game in which a lot of prize balls are paid out to the player is performed.

  On the other hand, the second type game machine (wing game machine) performs an auxiliary game triggered by the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and a special game is awarded according to the result of the auxiliary game. It is a gaming machine.

  Therefore, even in this wing game machine, the player first operates the handle so that the game ball can be received in the starting port. As a result, when a game ball is received at the start opening, an auxiliary game is performed in which the big prize opening device is opened for a predetermined time. Therefore, after the game ball is received at the start port, the player operates the handle so that the game ball enters the big prize opening device. As a result, when a game ball enters the above-mentioned large prize opening device, and this entered game ball is further entered into the special entrance, many prize balls are obtained as a series of games following this auxiliary game. A special game is paid out to the player.

By the way, in recent years, a gaming machine in which the gaming specifications of the feather game machine are incorporated in the digipachi gaming machine has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, although it is a single gaming machine, it is possible to play with two different types of gaming machines, and it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.
JP 2000-33152 A JP 2000-33153 A

  Thus, according to the conventional gaming machine, a decrease in the interest of the game is surely suppressed. However, the above conventional gaming machine has two different types of starting ports, and when a game ball enters one of these starting ports, the lottery process for winning the jackpot is executed and the other one When a game ball enters, an auxiliary game is executed. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the game as the digipachi gaming machine and the game as the feather game machine may proceed simultaneously, and it is unclear which game should be watched from the player side. It is clear and there is still room for improvement in suppressing the decline in the interest of games.

  Also, in such a gaming machine, if a game ball is inserted into one of these start ports, a lottery process for winning the jackpot is surely performed, and if a game ball is inserted into the other party An auxiliary game is always executed. For this reason, a player comes to play a game without any tension, and as a result, there is a concern that the player gets bored with such a game.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a situation, and it aims at providing the gaming machine which can suppress the fall of the interest of a game more suitably.

  In order to achieve such an object, in the first aspect of the present invention, the game area has a game area in which a game ball is driven toward the game area, and is provided in the game area of the game board. An opening / closing device capable of opening and closing between a closed state in which it is difficult to receive a game ball driven toward the open state and an open state in which it is easier to receive a game ball than the closed state, and a first start provided in the game area A second start port provided in the game area, having a movable member, and allowing a game ball to enter only when the movable member opens and closes; and to the first start port A first start determining means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered, and the first start determining means determines that a game ball has entered the first start opening. On the basis of this, the first hit which becomes the operation trigger of the movable member A first lottery means for performing a lottery process for all winnings, and when the first winning is won in the lottery process by the first lottery means, Drive control means for performing drive control of the movable member so as to be able to enter the ball, and the second start that is allowed to enter by drive control by the drive control means corresponding to the first winning winning. A second start determining means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the mouth; and the second start determining means determines that a game ball has entered the second start opening. The winning combination is won in the lottery process by the second lottery means for performing the lottery process in which either the winning combination or the big win is surely won based on The opening and closing device is opened and closed based on And when the game ball enters the opening / closing device that has been opened and closed, the ball enters the special area of the plurality of receiving areas including the special area and the lost area. A mechanical lottery device that performs a lottery lottery as to whether or not the played game balls are to be distributed, and the game balls entered in the opening / closing device are assigned to the special area among the plurality of receiving areas, And a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the game per bonus game is fulfilled when either of the conditions for winning the jackpot in the lottery process by the second lottery means is satisfied. And a second special game execution means, wherein the drive control means is advantageous for a player when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. Game information Advantageous state starting means for registering, advantageous state determining means for determining whether or not the advantageous game information is registered in driving control of the movable member, and the advantageous game information is registered by the advantageous state determining means. When it is determined that the advantageous game information is not registered, the drive control of the movable member is performed so that the time during which the game ball can enter the second starting port is longer than when the advantageous game information is not registered. An advantageous control means; and an advantageous state ending means for canceling registration of the advantageous game information by the advantageous state starting means in response to drive control by the advantageous control means being performed a predetermined number of times. The gist.

In such a configuration, the second starting port is provided so that a game ball can enter only when the drive control of the movable member by the drive control means is performed, and the drive control of the movable member is performed. When it was not performed, it was made impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port. That is, as a necessary condition for the above jackpot game to be performed,
(A) In a lottery process performed based on a game ball entering the first starting port, a first winning point that triggers the operation of the movable member is won.
(B) A game ball is further entered into the second starting port that is allowed to enter when the condition (a) is satisfied.
The logical product condition of the condition (A) and the condition (B) is adopted. In this way, by adopting a structure in which the two lottery processes are performed sequentially (stepwise), the two types of start ports (first start port, second start port, and the like) are viewed from the player side. It is made clear which one of the starting openings) should be operated so that the game ball enters the starting opening.

  However, in a gaming machine that employs such a staged game, in order to perform the lottery process by the second lottery means that can win the jackpot, first, a game ball is placed at the first starting port. You have to enter the ball. Next, the first win must be won in a lottery process according to this entry in which a big win cannot be won. Accordingly, the second lottery is performed during a predetermined period in which the movable member is driven and controlled in accordance with the winning in spite of winning the first winning in the first lottery process in which the big winning cannot be won. If a game ball does not enter the starting port, there is a concern that the interest of the game will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, during the period in which the advantageous game information is registered (during the so-called short time state), the game ball can enter the second starting port more than when the advantageous game information is not registered. By controlling the driving of the movable member so that the time to be played becomes longer, the probability of entering the second starting port when winning the first hit is increased, thereby playing the game I am trying to maintain my interests.

  By the way, the mechanical lottery apparatus for performing the above-mentioned distribution lottery usually has a guide part for guiding the game ball to the special area, and this guide part is operated in advance such as sliding or rotating in the opening / closing device. In many cases, it has a structure that is displaced regularly (periodically) with a mode. For this reason, especially when the time during which the game ball can enter the second starting port is long, the player places the game ball in the position of the guide unit for guiding the game ball to the special area and in the opening / closing device. By adjusting the timing at which the game ball enters the second starting port, the probability of entering the game ball into the special area, and thus the jackpot game is The probability of being done can be greatly increased. For example, if the time (timing) at which the game ball can enter the second start port is poor with respect to the position of the guide unit that guides the game ball to the special area, the player By trying not to enter the game ball into the starting port of the game and aim for the next opportunity, the above-mentioned time-short state is continued. According to such a playing technique, since the probability that the jackpot game is played is greatly increased, the short-time state advantageous to the player is continuously maintained. It is assumed that it will disappear.

In this regard, in the above configuration, when the movable member is driven and controlled a predetermined number of times during the period in which the advantageous game information is registered (so-called short-time state), the advantageous game information is registered. By canceling, such a short time state is ended (advantageous state end means). That is, in this case, when the movable member is operated a predetermined number of times, the so-called time-saving state is forcibly terminated regardless of the number of lottery processes executed in response to the game ball entering the second start port. Become so. Therefore, the player inserts the game ball into the second starting port based on the relationship between the position of the guide unit that guides the game ball to the special area and the timing at which the game ball enters the opening / closing device. It becomes difficult to adjust the timing to make the ball. That is, even during such a short time state, the game must be played so that the game ball enters the second starting port, and a sense of tension with respect to the game is suitably maintained.
However, when the movable member is operated for a predetermined number of times, in a gaming machine in which the so-called time-saving state is forcibly terminated, the player may not be able to enjoy the benefits of the so-called time-saving state, and as a result May fall. Therefore, in the above-described configuration, when even one game ball enters the second starting port, a lottery process is performed in which one of the above-mentioned bonuses and jackpots is always won. The interest of this is also maintained appropriately.

  According to this invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) which is a first embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

[Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened on one side of an outer frame of a pachinko machine and a front frame is opened on one side of the main body frame. Note that FIG. 1 shows a view in which the decorative member in the game area is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a front frame 4, a game board 5, and the like. The outer frame 2 is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame shape by upper, lower, left, and right wooden frame members, and has a lower receiving plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the front lower portion of the outer frame 2. On one side of the front surface of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 is attached by a hinge mechanism 7 so as to be opened and closed forward. The outer frame 2 may be formed of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

[About the frame structure]
2 is a front view showing the entire front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the main body frame 3 and the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 separated obliquely from the upper right front.
2 and 4, the main body frame 3 is configured by integrally molding the front frame body 11, the game board mounting frame 12 and the mechanism mounting body 13 with a synthetic resin material. The front frame body 11 of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the support plate 6 on the front side of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 1). A main body frame side hinge device 15 is fixed to the upper and lower portions on one side of the front frame body 11, and a hinge pin and a hinge are connected to the outer frame side hinge device 14 fixed to the upper and lower portions on one side of the outer frame 2. It is mounted so that it can be opened and closed by a hole. That is, the hinge mechanism 7 is configured by the outer frame side hinge tool 14, the main body frame side hinge tool 15, the hinge pin, and the hinge hole.

  On the front side of the front frame body 11, a speaker box portion 16 is integrally formed in the front lower left area of the front frame body 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, and is formed in the front opening portion of the speaker box portion 16. The speaker mounting plate 17 is mounted so as to close the opening. A speaker 18 is mounted on the speaker mounting plate 17. In addition, in the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 11, a firing rail 19 is attached to the upper half of the front frame 11 in an inclined manner. A lower front plate 30 is mounted on the lower half of the lower area of the front surface of the front frame 11. A lower tray 31 capable of storing game balls is provided at a substantially central portion of the front surface of the lower front plate 30, an operation handle 32 is provided on the right side, and an ashtray 33 is provided on the left side. . The lower plate 31 is provided with a ball discharge lever 34 for discharging the game ball downward.

[About front frame configuration]
As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the front frame 4 is provided on one side of the front surface of the front frame 11 so as to cover a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame 11 to the upper edge of the lower front plate 30. Is attached to the front by a hinge mechanism 36 so as to be openable and closable. In addition, a substantially circular opening window 38 through which the game area 37 of the game board 5 can be seen through from the front is formed at a substantially central portion of the front frame 4. Further, a window frame 39 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 38 is provided on the rear side of the front frame 4, and a transparent plate 50 such as a glass plate or a transparent resin plate is mounted on the window frame 39. . Further, substantially the entire front surface of the front frame 4 is decorated by a front decoration member in which a lamp or the like is provided, and an upper plate 51 is formed at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 4. Specifically, around the opening window 38, a side decoration device 52 is mounted on the left and right sides, an upper plate 51 is mounted on the lower portion, and an acoustic decoration device 53 is mounted on the upper portion. The side decoration device 52 is mainly configured by a side decoration body 54 in which a lamp substrate (decoration lamp) is disposed and formed of a synthetic resin material. A plurality of slit-like opening holes that are long in the horizontal direction are arranged in the side decoration body 54 in the vertical direction, and a lens 55 corresponding to a light source disposed on the lamp substrate is incorporated in the opening hole. The acoustic decoration device 53 includes a transparent cover body 56, a speaker 57, a speaker cover 58, a prize ball lamp 396, a reflector body (not shown), and the like, and these constituent members are assembled together to form a unit. .

[Configuration of locking device]
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, a function of locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 is provided on the rear side of the free end side opposite to the hinge mechanism 36 of the front frame body 11. A locking device 70 having a function of locking the front frame 4 to the main body frame 3 is mounted. That is, in this embodiment, the locking device 70 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 72 that detachably engage with a closing tool 71 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the body frame 3 in a closed state, From the front of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 74 that detachably engage with a closing tool 73 provided on the rear side of the front end of the front frame 4 to lock the front frame 4 in a closed state. And a cylinder lock 75 that is exposed through the front frame 11 and the lower front plate 30 so that the key can be inserted and unlocked. Then, a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 75 and rotated in one direction, so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 72 and the closing tool 71 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is unlocked. By rotating in the opposite direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 74 and the closing tool 73 of the front frame 4 is released and the front frame 4 is unlocked.

[Configuration of game board mounting frame and game board]
3 is an enlarged front view showing the configuration of the game area 37, FIG. 5 is a rear view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIGS. 11 and 12 are perspective views showing the configuration of the game area 37. .

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3 is provided on the rear side of the front frame body 11, and the game board 5 is mounted so as to be attachable / detachable from the front. . The game board 5 is formed in a substantially square plate shape having a size to be fitted from the front of the game board mounting frame 12. A guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 is provided on the board surface (front surface) of the game board 5, and a game area 37 is defined inside the guide rail 78. A predetermined gap is provided between the launch rail 19 and the guide rail 78, and when the launched game ball returns to the guide rail 78, the game ball is discharged from the gap. It is configured to be guided by the lower plate 31. Further, a front structural member 79 made of synthetic resin is attached to the front surface of the game board 5 in the outer region of the guide rail 78.

  As shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 11, FIG. 12, and FIG. A windmill (not shown) is provided. A center accessory 91 is disposed at a substantially central position of the game area 37. The design of the center accessory 91 characterizes the model of the pachinko machine 1, the game concept, and the like. Details of the center accessory 91 will be described later.

  In addition, an effect display device 115 for effect display of the lottery result is provided behind the center accessory 91. As the effect display device 115, for example, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information obtained by combining decorative symbol image information, background image information, character image information, and the like is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 115.

In the game area 37,
A normal symbol start port (first start port) 96 formed as a gate type start port.
A special symbol start port (second start port) 82 formed as a lateral hole of the game board 5.
A second movable piece (movable member) 81 that performs an operation that is a necessary condition for the game ball to enter the special symbol start opening 82.
A special winning opening 141 formed as an entrance from an area outside the center accessory 91 (second game area) to an area inside the area (first game area).
The first movable piece 142 operable to increase the probability of entering the game ball from the area outside the center accessory 91 (second game area) into the area inside the first game area (first game area).
An attacker device 98;
A game ball that is formed on the most downstream side in the flow direction of the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37 and that has not won any of the big winning port 141, the special symbol starting port 82, the normal symbol starting port 96, etc. A ball discharge port 88 for discharging the game from the game area 37 to the back side.

  Here, when the game ball is received in the normal symbol start port 96 (when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 96), the first start port sensor 318 (see FIG. 41) described later determines the game ball. Passage is detected. Then, at this time, a lottery process for winning about the hit that becomes the operation trigger of the second movable piece 81 is performed based on a random number that is updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range. In accordance with the result of the lottery process, the normal symbol display 333, which will be described later, displays the variation for a predetermined time (normal symbol variation display control). As a result of the lottery process, when the above winning combination is won, drive control of an ordinary accessory driving mechanism 334 (see FIG. 41) described later is performed. As a result, the second movable piece 81 operates so that the game ball entering the special symbol start opening 82 is switched from an impossible mode (rejected ball mode) to a possible mode (allowed ball mode). Will come to do. Note that the ordinary accessory driving mechanism 334 is for operating the second movable piece 81 and is configured to include, for example, a solenoid. The special symbol starting port 82 is always maintained in a rejected ball shape by the second movable piece 81.

  As will be described later, the second movable piece 81 is a tongue piece that slides in a direction perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 5 in the special symbol start opening 82 as the lateral hole (FIG. 40: receiving A guide member 535) is provided. In such a configuration, when the drive control of the ordinary accessory driving mechanism 334 (see FIG. 41) is performed, the tongue piece slides in a form extending from the inside of the special symbol starting port 82 to the outside thereof. Thus, the game ball can enter the special symbol starting port 82 while being guided by the second movable piece 81 that has been slid.

  Also, as will be described later, when a game ball enters (wins) the special symbol start opening 82 which is allowed to enter by sliding operation of the second movable piece 81, the second second described later. A winning of a game ball is detected by a start port sensor 317 (see FIG. 41). At this time, a special symbol (second game information) dynamically displayed on a special symbol display 332 (see FIG. 41), which will be described later, is variably displayed for a predetermined time (variable display control of special symbols). At the same time, lottery processing is performed for winning the winning combination that is the trigger for the operation of the first movable piece 142 (hereinafter referred to as “small hit”) and the jackpot that is the trigger for executing the special game described later (second Lottery means). However, in this embodiment, in the lottery process, either the small winning (per bonus) or the big winning is always won. As a result of such lottery processing, when the above-mentioned small win is won, drive control of a special prize opening / closing mechanism 335 (see FIG. 41) described later is performed. As a result, the first movable piece 142 is operated in such a manner that the grand prize winning opening 141 is opened, and the game ball can enter the area (first game area) in the center accessory 91. (Auxiliary game (game per game)). The special prize opening / closing mechanism 335 is for operating the first movable piece 142, and includes, for example, a solenoid. Further, as will be described later, when a game ball enters the area (first game area) in the center accessory 91, the first game ball of the game ball is provided by a winning hole sensor 330 provided at an appropriate location. Entry into the game area is detected, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out in response to the detection. However, when the above jackpot is won, a special game (to be described later) in which more prize balls are paid out to the player is performed without such an auxiliary game (game per game). The center accessory 91 according to this embodiment includes the first movable piece 142, the effect display device 115, a composite guiding device 293 and a rotary sorting device 294 (FIG. 24), which will be described later. ing.

  The first movable piece 142 is in a closed state so that it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball in the big prize opening 141 at all times. The opening 141 is opened.

  Further, the attacker device 98 includes an opening / closing member 99 that opens and closes in the second game area, and a lower large winning opening 83 that is also opened in the second game area through the opening and closing operation by the opening and closing member 99. It is configured with. In this embodiment, when the result of the lottery process by entering the game ball into the special symbol start opening 82 is the big hit, or through the opening / closing operation of the first movable piece 142, the first game area When a game ball that has entered inside is received in a specific area (special entrance) 344 (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, the player is released by opening the lower large winning opening 83 through the opening / closing operation by the opening / closing member 99. A special game advantageous to the player is performed. As will be described later, when a game ball enters the lower side big prize opening 83, a count sensor 319 (see FIG. 41) provided at an appropriate location causes the game ball to enter the lower side big prize opening 83. An incoming ball is detected. The opening / closing member 99 is configured to open and close by drive control of an attacker drive mechanism 339 (see FIG. 41) configured with a solenoid or the like.

  Here, the special game that is performed when the jackpot is won is, for example, when the operation of opening and closing the opening and closing member 99 in a certain pattern is a round game, this round game is repeated an arbitrary number of times (second predetermined period). Done by being executed. In this embodiment, the number of round games repeatedly performed at the time of the big hit is “15”.

  On the other hand, the special game that is performed when the game ball is received in a specific area 344 (see FIG. 31) described later is performed as a series of games that follow the auxiliary game. That is, the auxiliary game accompanied by the opening / closing operation of the first movable piece 142 is, so to speak, a single round game, and the attacker is followed by the auxiliary game on condition that a game ball enters the specific area 344. In the device 98, the round game is repeatedly executed an arbitrary number of times. In this embodiment, the number of round games of special games performed as a series of games following such auxiliary games is “15”. In other words, in this case, the above-described attacker device 98 plays round games for the number of times “14” obtained by subtracting “1” from “15”. As described above, the round game performed in response to the game ball entering the specific area 344 has fewer rounds than the jackpot game performed in response to the result of the second lottery process. Therefore, the jackpot game that is performed in response to the result of the second lottery process is a game that is more advantageous to the player than the round game that is performed in response to the game ball entering the specific area 344. . This is because the probability of winning the jackpot in the second lottery process is the combined probability of the probability of winning the jackpot in the second lottery process and the probability of entering the specific area 344 in the auxiliary game (third lottery process) Therefore, a reduction in interest is suppressed by making the jackpot game performed in accordance with the fact that the result of the second lottery process is a jackpot more advantageous games.

  However, the number of rounds in the round game performed in response to the game ball entering the specific area 344 and the number of rounds in the jackpot game performed in accordance with the result of the second lottery process are substantially Alternatively, the number of times may be the same. For example, the number of rounds in a round game performed in response to a game ball entering the specific area 344 is 16 rounds (substantially 15 rounds when the auxiliary game is 1 round), and the result of the second lottery process is This is a case where the number of rounds in the jackpot game performed in response to the jackpot is 15 rounds. At this time, even if it is a case where the second lottery process is a big hit instead of a big win, the result of the second lottery process is that the game ball enters the specific area 344 in the auxiliary game. The player is given substantially the same gaming value in the jackpot game that is played in response to the jackpot being played and the round game that is played in response to the game ball entering the specific area 344 in the auxiliary game. Will be. Accordingly, even when a round game is performed in response to the game ball entering the specific area 344 in the auxiliary game, the player does not feel lost and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. . In addition, even if the second lottery process is a big hit instead of a big win, it is substantially equivalent to the big win game performed in response to the result of the second lottery process being a big win Since the game value of the game board 5 may be given, the game board 5 has another configuration as the normal symbol display on the lower left side of the center accessory 91. There are provided three LEDs 84 functioning as 333 (see FIG. 41) and a normal holding ball lamp 323 composed of four LEDs 85 indicating the start memory state of the normal symbol.

  Here, in the normal symbol display device 333, the three LEDs 84 are blinked (dynamically displayed) separately to perform the variable display control of the normal symbol (first game information). Then, after this variable display control is performed for a predetermined time, the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol is displayed by the display mode (lighting combination) of the three LEDs 84 as the normal symbol display 333. The player is notified.

  Further, the normal reserved ball lamp 323 displays the start memory number of normal symbols. That is, as will be described later, the main control board 765 (see FIG. 41), which will be described later, once holds the execution of the first lottery process when a game ball wins the normal symbol starting port 96. In this embodiment, up to four of the normal symbol start-up memories are held, and the number of holds (“0” to “4”) is determined by the lighting state of the four LEDs 85 as the normal holding ball lamp 323. The person is informed.

  In the present embodiment, “normal symbol start memory” means that the first lottery process is suspended in response to a game ball winning in the normal symbol start port 96. More specifically, a random number that is updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range in response to the winning of a game ball at the normal symbol start opening 96 is acquired, and when the normal symbol variation display is performed, the acquired This means that whether or not a random number is correct is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a random number that is updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range in response to the winning of a game ball at the normal symbol starting port 96 is acquired and the validity of the acquired random number is determined. A determination may be made to suspend the normal symbol fluctuation display control. That is, in addition to reserving the execution of the first lottery process, the display control of the result of the first lottery process is also retained.

  Further, below the normal symbol display 333 and the holding ball lamp, there are three LEDs 86 functioning as the special symbol display 332 (see FIG. 41) and one LED 87 indicating the hold state of the special symbol variable display control. A special holding ball lamp 322 is provided.

  Here, in the special symbol display 332, the three LEDs 86 are individually flashed (dynamically displayed), whereby the variation display control of the special symbol is performed. Then, after this variable display control is performed for a predetermined time, the result of the lottery process for the special symbol is displayed by the display mode (lighting combination) of the three LEDs 86 as the special symbol indicator 332. The player will be notified.

  In addition, the special reserved ball lamp 322 displays the number of special symbols held, which is the number of variable display control of special symbols in the hold state. That is, as will be described later, the main control board 765 (see FIG. 41) described later temporarily puts the variable display control in a suspended state when performing the special symbol variable display control. In this embodiment, the variable symbol display control of the special symbol is suspended up to a maximum of one, and the number of suspension (“0” to “1”) is the lighting mode of one LED 87 as the special reserved ball lamp 322. Is notified to the player.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5, at the lower rear side of the game board 5, as a collective bag for receiving the game balls flowing into various winning devices and guiding the game balls to a predetermined position in a portion extending from the center portion to the lower portion. A box mounting base 118 having both the above function and the function as a box mounting portion is provided. A sub-control board box 130 in which a sub-control board 119 such as a sound control board and a lamp control board is housed is mounted on the box mounting base 118 and is superposed on the rear side of the sub-control board box 130. A main control board box 132 in which the main control board 765 is stored is mounted. Further, in a state where the box mounting base 118, the sub control board box 130 and the main control board box 132 are respectively mounted on the rear side of the game board 5, the game board 5 is moved from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3. The box mounting base 118, the sub control board box 130, and the main control board box 132 are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the outline of the game board 5 so as to be fitted and installed.

  In the pachinko machine 1 having such a game board 5, when a player operates the operation handle 32, a game ball is launched and the game ball is driven from the launch port 78 a toward the game area 37. When the game ball is received at the normal symbol starting port 96 and the result of the first lottery process is winning, the second movable piece 81 extends from the inside of the special symbol starting port 82 to the outside thereof. The game ball can enter the special symbol starting port 82. At this time, if the game ball further enters (wins) the special symbol start opening 82 and the result of the second lottery process is a small hit, the first winning opening 141 is opened. The movable piece 142 operates, whereby an auxiliary game (third lottery process) is performed in which the area in the center accessory 91 is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, when a game ball enters the area within the center accessory 91 and the entered game ball is further received by the specific area 344 (see FIG. 31), many prize balls are paid out to the player. A special game is played by opening the lower large winning opening 83.

  Next, the special start port unit 530 having the second movable piece 81 and the special symbol start port 82 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a front view showing the special start port unit 530. FIG. 37 is a perspective view of the special start port unit 530 as seen from the upper right front. FIG. 38 is a perspective view of the internal mechanism of the special start port unit 530 as viewed from the upper left front. FIG. 39 is a cut perspective view showing the special start port unit 530 cut in the vertical direction. FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the special start port unit 530 as viewed from the upper right rear.

  36 to 40, the special start port unit 530 communicates with the special symbol start port 82 opened to the board surface of the game board 5 (see FIG. 3), and the special symbol start port 82. A special winning device 532 having a winning path 531 (see FIG. 39) extended to the back side of the game board 5; an immersion position located in the winning path 531; The receiving guide member 535 as the tongue piece supported so as to be slidable with respect to the position, and the ordinary accessory driving mechanism 334 that slides the receiving guide member 535 in the front-rear direction. .

  Here, the winning path 531 is provided in the winning device casing 538 as a horizontal hole of the game board 5, and the opening is formed as the special symbol starting port 82. The special symbol starting port 82 is formed in a convex shape so that the width on the lower side is wider than that on the upper side.

  Further, as described above, the receiving guide member 535 has a tongue-like shape that slides in the upper entry award passage 531 as a horizontal hole of the game board 5 in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 5. It is provided as a member. However, more precisely, the receiving guiding member 535 has an inclined surface 534 formed in a downward gradient toward the back side of the winning path 531, and the special surface of the game ball is formed by the inclined surface 534. The entrance to the symbol starting port 82 is guided. That is, when the receiving guiding member 535 is in a state (projecting position) extending from the inside to the outside of the special symbol starting port 82, it passes to the special symbol starting port 82 of the game ball through the inclined surface 534. It functions to guide the entrance of the ball. On the other hand, when the receiving guide member 535 is inside the special symbol start port 82 (immersion position), the game ball to the special symbol start port 82 is not received without receiving the game ball flowing down the game area 37. Do not guide the entrance of. Through the function of the receiving guide member 535, the second movable piece 81 performs a sliding operation that is a necessary condition for the game ball to enter the special symbol start port 82. The receiving guide member 535 is configured to overflow the game ball received at the protruding position when switching from the protruding position to the immersive position.

  By the way, since the receiving guide member 535 is a tongue-shaped member, even when a game ball is received, the receiving guide member 535 receives the received game ball before reaching the special symbol start port 82. When the stop guide member 535 returns to the immersion position, the game ball is discharged to the game area 37 without winning (entering) the special symbol starting port 82. That is, when the receiving guide member 535 is displaced to the immersive position, the game ball on the receiving guide member 535 tends to stay in place by inertial force, and thus falls from the tip of the receiving guide member 535. Become. Thus, even if the game ball can be placed on the receiving guide member 535, the game ball does not always win the special symbol start port 82, and therefore the player is intimidated until the game ball wins. It becomes possible.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the receiving guide member 535 is in the immersive position, the tip end portion (the highest position portion) of the inclined surface 534 is located near the opening portion of the special symbol start port 82. Like that. That is, in this case, the space above the tip of the receiving guide member 535 is a substantial opening of the special symbol starting port 82 (inlet when the game ball enters the special symbol starting port 82). Become. Then, the substantial opening when the receiving guide member 535 is in the immersive position is formed to be small enough to prevent the game ball from entering (the substantial opening is larger than the diameter of the game ball). The second movable piece 81 is arranged so as to prevent the game ball from entering the special symbol starting port 82 by reducing the height of the second symbol.

  On the other hand, when the receiving guide member 535 is slid from the retracted position and displaced to the protruding position, a portion having a lower position than the tip (the center portion or the root portion of the receiving guide member 535). ) Is located in the vicinity of the opening of the special symbol starting port 82. That is, in this case, the space above the central portion (or the root portion) of the receiving guide member 535 is a substantial opening of the special symbol starting port 82 (the game ball enters the special symbol starting port 82. Time entrance). The substantial opening at this time is formed large enough to allow the game ball to enter (the height of the substantial opening is made larger than the diameter of the game ball). As a result, the game ball can enter the special symbol starting port 82 by the sliding operation of the second movable piece 81.

  By the way, the receiving guide member 535 has a pointed shape with a sharp tip toward the player side so that the number of locations where the ball is engaged is extremely small. Therefore, when the tip of the receiving guide member 535 comes into contact with the center of the game ball, there is still a possibility of biting the ball, but even if the tip of the receiving guide member 535 is slightly from the center of the game ball. In the case of deviation, a force in a direction away from the tip of the receiving guide member 535 is applied to the game ball, and the game ball is not pinched.

  Further, wall portions 539 are erected from the left and right edge portions of the receiving guide member 535, and these wall portions 539 extend toward the back side of the winning path 531. According to this, the game ball received by the receiving guide member 535 can be guided toward the special symbol starting port 82 side without being discharged (dropped) from the left and right sides of the receiving guide member 535. . Further, the receiving guide member 535 can be formed in a flat plate shape. As a result, even if the height of the special symbol start port 82 and the winning passage 531 is relatively low, the receiving guiding member 535 can be inserted into the winning passage 531. It is possible to provide a space for receiving the game ball to be housed inside and above the receiving guide member 535. In addition, since the front-end | tip part of the receiving guidance member 535 is formed in the flat plate shape which does not have the wall part 539 in a right-and-left edge part, even when a player sees the receiving guidance member 535 from right and left diagonally forward. The behavior of the game ball rolling on the receiving guide member 535 can be clearly seen. Further, by omitting the wall portion of the tip portion, the left and right frontage on the tip side becomes wide, and when the receiving guide member 535 returns to the immersive position, the game ball placed on the receiving guide member 535 is placed. Can be easily discharged from the distal end portion of the receiving guide member 535.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39, an outlet 541 through which a game ball won in the special winning device 532 flows out from the winning passage 531 is formed in the center portion of the bottom surface of the winning device casing 538, and the receiving guiding member An opening 542 that always communicates with the outflow port 541 is formed between the pair of wall portions 539 at the rear of the 535 regardless of the position of the receiving guide member 535. Therefore, not only when the receiving guide member 535 is in the protruding position (shown by a solid line), but also when the receiving guide member 535 is in the immersive position before the game ball flows out of the winning path 531 (in the two-dot chain line). After that, the game ball can flow out through the opening 542 and the outlet 541. In particular, a movable guide wall 543 that guides a winning game ball to the outlet 541 is provided between the pair of walls 539 behind the opening 542, and the movable guide wall 543 has a position where the receiving guide member 535 protrudes. It is comprised so that it may be located in the back vicinity of the outflow port 541 at the time. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the game ball won in the special symbol starting port 82 from entering behind the movable guide wall 543 and to drop naturally toward the outlet 541. In addition, since the movable guide wall 543 is provided horizontally between the pair of wall portions 539, the pair of wall portions 539 can be supported in parallel and deformation of the wall portion 539 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the winning device casing 538 is divided into an opaque front case portion 545 and a rear case portion 546 made of a light transmissive member, and is formed on the front surface of the front case portion 545. The flange portion 547 is fixed to the board surface of the game board 5. That is, two attachment holes 557 are formed in the flange portion 547, and screws or the like (not shown) are inserted into the attachment holes 557 and screwed into the game board 5, so that the board surface of the game board 5 is formed. Mounted. Inside the rear case portion 546, a guide portion 544 that restricts sliding of the pair of wall portions 539 in the front-rear direction is formed so as to sandwich the wall portion 539, and the receiving guide member 535 slides smoothly. It is possible to make it. In particular, since the guide portion 544 is formed integrally with the rear case portion 546, the positional relationship between the winning path 531 and the guide portion 544 can be accurately maintained, and the receiving guide member 535 can be made smoother. Can be slid.

  As shown in FIG. 38, a solenoid 548 that functions as a drive source for the receiving guide member 535 is accommodated in the rear case portion 546. The solenoid 548 is disposed so that the tip of the plunger 549 faces the player side. An arm member 551 is provided between the plunger 549 and the wall portion 539 so that the reciprocating linear motion of the plunger 549 is reversed and transmitted to the wall portion 539. More specifically, the arm member 551 has a pair of arm portions 551a that sandwich the pair of wall portions 539 and whose lower ends are hooked from the outside with respect to the wall portion 539, and bias the wall portion 539 in the front-rear direction. A support shaft portion 552 that protrudes outward from the arm portion 551a and is supported between the front case portion 545 and the rear case portion 546 so as to rotatably support the arm portion 551a, and each arm portion 551a. And a contact portion 551b that contacts the tip of the plunger 549 and extends from the upper end of one arm portion 551a so as to be substantially parallel to the contact portion 551b. It is comprised from the latching | locking part 551c latched by. A coil spring (not shown) that energizes the plunger 549 so as to protrude when the solenoid 548 is not energized is wound around the plunger 549. According to this, the tip of the plunger 549 and the wall portion 539 are connected via the arm member 551, and the movement direction of the plunger 549 is reversed and transmitted to the wall portion 539. Specifically, when the solenoid 548 is not energized, the plunger 549 is protruded by the biasing force of the coil spring, and the wall portion 539 and the receiving guide member 535 are in the retracted position. On the other hand, when the solenoid 548 is energized, the plunger 549 enters an immersive state against the urging force of the coil spring. Then, the upper end portion of the arm portion 551a is pulled toward the solenoid 548 via the contact portion 551b and the locking portion 551c of the arm member 551, and the arm portion 551a rotates about the support shaft portion 552. As a result, the wall portion 539 connected to the lower end of the arm portion 551a slides toward the player, and the wall portion 539 and the receiving guide member 535 are in the protruding position.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 40, a braking gate member 554 is provided above the special symbol starting port 82 so as to protrude from the board surface of the game board 5 to the player side. The brake gate member 554 allows the game ball flowing down the game area 37 to pass while being braked, and is set so that the inner diameter is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. According to this, since the game ball that has passed through the brake gate member 554 and the momentum is suppressed is placed on the upper surface of the receiving guide member 535, the game ball can be settled on the receiving guide member 535. Therefore, it is possible to reliably guide the game ball dropped on the receiving guide member 535 toward the special symbol starting port 82. Further, the impact received by the receiving guide member 535 is weakened, and the receiving guide member 535 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. In addition, a protrusion 555 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the brake gate member 554 on the player side to change the rolling direction of the passing game ball to the special symbol start port 82 side. Therefore, even when the protruding length of the receiving guide member 535 is relatively short, the game ball that has passed through the braking gate member 554 can be placed on the receiving guide member 535. Further, since the rolling is performed toward the special symbol starting port 82 side, even if the inclination degree on the inclined surface 534 of the receiving guide member 535 is relatively gentle, the guiding is smoothly performed toward the special symbol starting port 82. be able to.

  A pair of entry preventing members 558 extend obliquely downward on both the left and right sides of the brake gate member 554. The entry preventing member 558 prevents the game ball passing outside the braking gate member 554 from rolling toward the receiving guide member 535, and according to this, the passing ball has passed through the braking gate member 554. Only the game ball can be placed on the receiving guide member 535, and the game ball received by the receiving guide member 535 is not affected by another game ball that does not pass through the braking gate member 554, that is, a game ball with strong momentum. It can be prevented from being played.

  As shown in FIG. 38, a winning prevention member 561 is disposed above the receiving guide member 535 in the winning passage 531. The winning prevention member 561 opens the special symbol start port 82 when the receiving guide member 535 is in the protruding position, and closes the special symbol start port 82 when the receiving guide member 535 is in the retracted position. Specifically, the special symbol starting port 82 is closed at the tip side portion to prevent the entry of the game ball, and the special symbol starting port 82 is opened by retreating to the back side of the winning path 531 to thereby play the game ball. It slides in the front-rear direction between the entry permission positions that allow entry of the vehicle. For this reason, when the receiving guide member 535 is in the immersive position, even if the game ball flowing down the game area 37 bounces back to the special symbol starting port 82 side, it can be prevented from entering from the special symbol starting port 82.

  The winning prevention member 561 is connected to the plunger 549 of the solenoid 548 via the connecting member 562 (ordinary accessory driving mechanism 334). In other words, in the normal accessory driving mechanism 334, when the plunger 549 is operated, the reciprocating linear motion is transmitted to the winning prevention member 561 through the connecting member 562, and the receiving guiding member is connected through the arm member 551. 535 is transmitted. The arm member 551 is a member that reverses and transmits the movement direction in the reciprocating linear motion of the plunger 549, and thereby the winning prevention member 561 and the receiving guide member 535 are displaced in the opposite directions.

[Configuration of body frame mechanism mounting body, ball tank and tank rail]
FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing the state in which various members are assembled to the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 from obliquely upper right rear, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view showing the main body frame 3 alone from obliquely upper right rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3 is formed with a tank mounting portion 133, a rail mounting portion 134, a dispensing device mounting portion 135, and the like. The ball tank 136 is mounted. The ball tank 136 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is formed in a box shape opening upward so that a large number of game balls supplied from the island facility can be stored. The storage state of the game balls in the ball tank 136 is visible through the rear side wall of the ball tank 136. In addition, a discharge port 138 for discharging a game ball is formed at the rear corner of the bottom plate portion 137 of the ball tank 136, and the bottom plate portion 137 is formed on an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the discharge port 138. .

  The mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3 is integrally formed with a rail mounting portion 134 so as to approach the tank mounting portion 133 downward, and the rail component 139 is mounted on the rail mounting portion 134 so that the tank rail 150 is configured. That is, in this embodiment, the rail mounting portion 134 is formed in a state in which the upper lateral portion of the main body frame 3 is recessed by a predetermined depth, and the back side wall of the recess is used as the front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150. An inclined rail shelf 155 is formed along the lower edge of the concave portion so as to incline downward from one end (left end toward FIG. 9) to the other end (right end toward FIG. 9). An upward surface extending in the lateral direction of the rail shelf 155 is a rail receiving portion 158.

  The rail constituting member 139 that is mounted on the rail mounting portion 134 and constitutes the tank rail 150 includes a rear wall portion 152 that forms a rail passage between the rail mounting portion 134 and the front wall portion 151, and an inclined lower plate And a partition wall (both not shown) that project along the center in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower plate part and divide the rail passage into front and rear rows (in this embodiment, front and rear rows). It is formed in preparation. The rail constituting member 139 is attached to the rail attaching portion 134 by an appropriate attachment means, thereby forming a tank rail 150 having a plurality of front and rear rows of rail passages. Then, after the game balls discharged from the discharge port 138 of the ball tank 136 (dropped by its own weight) are received at one end of the rail passages in the front and rear rows of the tank rail 150, the game balls are moved along the rail passage by their own weight. And rolling toward the other end of the rail passage. Further, in this embodiment, the rail component member 139 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, whereby the flow state of the game balls in the rail passage is visually recognized through the rear wall portion 152 of the rail component member 139. It is possible.

  The front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150 (rail mounting portion 134) has a first space portion to avoid interference with the upper end portion of the rear portion of the equipment (for example, the center accessory 91) protruding rearward of the game board 5. It is provided in a separated state. In this embodiment, the rear end of the rail shelf 155 serving as the rear end portion of the main body frame 3 and the rear wall portion of the tank rail 150 are substantially flush with the rear side wall of the ball tank 136. In other words, the tank rail 150 is arranged behind the rear surface of the game board 5 so that the rear wall portion of the ball tank 136 is substantially flush with the rear wall portion of the ball tank 136. Thereby, a first space portion for avoiding interference with the rear portion of the center accessory 91 is provided between the rear side of the game board 5 and the front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150.

Above the tank rail 150, a rectifying body 156 for aligning the game balls flowing in the rail passage without overlapping vertically is mounted on the upper portion thereof so as to be swingable about the shaft 157. The rectifier 156 is provided with a weight from the center to the bottom.
[Configuration of payout device mounting part and ball payout device]
As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, in the vertical direction of one side of the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3, a vertically long paying device attached corresponding to a ball paying device (ball paying unit) 170 described below is mounted. A portion 135 is formed. The dispensing device mounting portion 135 is formed in a concave shape having an opening on the rear side. In addition, an opening 173 through which a payout motor 172 (see FIG. 4) of the ball payout device 170 can project is formed at a predetermined position of a back wall portion (not shown) having a stepped shape of the payout device mounting portion 135. .

  In a state where the ball paying device 170 is mounted in the recess of the paying device mounting portion 135, a second space portion is provided between the game board 5 and the first space portion, which is at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction. . Thus, the rail passage and the ball passage are arranged at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction. Further, the rear end of the body frame 3, that is, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion of the dispensing device mounting portion 135, the rear end of the rail shelf 155, the rear surfaces of the ball tank 136, the tank rail 150, and the ball dispensing device 170 are substantially the same surface. ing.

  The ball payout device 170 has a vertically long box shape that is substantially the same size as the recess of the payout device mounting portion 135, and is unitized by mounting various parts related to payout. The ball payout device 170 is fitted from the rear opening of the concave portion of the payout device mounting portion 135 and is mounted by appropriate mounting means (for example, mounting means such as an elastic clip, a locking claw, and a screw). It has become.

  Although not shown, the ball dispensing device 170 is formed by dividing the ball passages having inflow ports respectively communicating with the outlets of the rail passages in the tank rail 150 into a plurality of front and rear rows (for example, front and rear rows). Also, the downstream portions of the front and rear rows of ball passages formed in the interior are bifurcated to form front and rear rows of prize balls, a ball rental ball passage and a ball removal ball passage. In addition, a payout member (not shown) made of a rotating body for distributing and paying out game balls to any of the passages is rotated in the forward and reverse directions at a branch portion between the winning ball and the ball passage for lending and the ball passage for ball removal. It is arranged to be possible.

[Equipment on the lower rear of the main frame]
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, on the rear side of the front frame body 11 of the main body frame 3, one side of the rear lower region of the front frame body 11 located below the game board mounting frame 12 (toward FIG. 5). On the left side), a launching hammer (not shown) for launching a game ball sent to the launching position of the lower inclined end of the launching rail 19, a launching motor 192 for operating the launching hammer, and the like are attached to the mounting substrate 193. An assembling unit 194 is mounted. In addition, a power supply board box 196 that houses the power supply board 195 is mounted at a substantially central portion of the rear lower region of the front frame body 11, and the dispensing control board 775 is placed in a state of being superimposed on the rear side of the power supply board box 196. A payout control board box 198 is mounted. As will be described later, the payout control board 775 includes a RAM for storing the number of payout game balls, and sends out a control signal for paying out game balls in accordance with a payout signal transmitted from the main control board 765 (see FIG. 41) to control the operation of the dispensing motor 172. In this embodiment, the payout control board 775 is provided with an error LED indicator 777 and an error release switch 778 on its lower side, and a ball removal switch 779 on its upper side. The error LED indicator 777 displays operation error states such as a broken ball, a broken ball, a prize ball stock (there is an unpaid portion), a connection abnormality, and the like. When the error cancel switch 778 is operated, a voice guidance is transmitted from the speakers 18 and 57 to inform the error canceling method according to the operation error state. The ball removal switch 779 is a switch for starting to discharge the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150.

[Configuration of rear cover body]
FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine 1 from the upper right rear.
As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the rear ends of the display device control board box 117 (see FIG. 11) and the main control board box 132 arranged on the rear surface of the game board 5 are opened at the center of the mechanism mounting body 13. Projecting toward the window opening. And between the side wall part which comprises one side wall of the window opening part of the mechanism mounting body 13, and the one side wall of the dispensing device mounting part 135 which comprises the other side wall, a substantially square box shape is formed by an opaque synthetic resin material. The formed rear cover body 210 is detachably mounted by a cover hinge mechanism 211.

  The rear cover body 210 is configured integrally with a substantially rectangular rear wall portion 212 and a peripheral wall portion 213 that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the rear wall portion 212. Of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, the wall portion 213 a on one side is attached and detached from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 214 formed at a total of three locations above and below the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. A hinge body 216 having a hinge pin 215 that can be fitted downward is integrally formed. Further, of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, the other wall portion 213b has a locking claw that can be elastically engaged with a locking hole formed in one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135. An elastic closing body 217 is integrally formed.

  That is, in the rear cover body 210, the hinge pins 215 of the upper and lower and intermediate hinge bodies 216 are respectively fitted from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 214 of the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. In this state, the rear cover body 210 is rotated toward the other side of the mechanism mounting body 13 around the hinge pin 215, and the elastic closing body 217 is inserted into the locking hole on one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135. The rear cover body 210 is held in the closed state on the rear side of the mechanism mounting body 13 by being elastically engaged. Then, the rear cover body 210 covers the entire display device control board box 117 (see FIG. 11) on the rear surface of the game board 5 and a portion extending from the substantially middle portion to the upper end of the main control board box 132 by the rear cover body 210. ing. As a result, the board connector of the main control board 765 exposed to the upper part of the main control board box 132 (mainly a board connector for connecting to the display device control board 116) is hidden from view behind.

  Further, a portion from the substantially middle portion to the lower end of the main control board box 132 is exposed without being covered by the rear cover body 210. The inspection connector 218 disposed on the main control board 765 is exposed below the main control board box 132, and the inspection connector 218 on the main control board 765 is closed with the rear cover body 210 closed. A board inspection device (not shown) can be connected to the connector 218 for inspection. In addition, by operating the RAM clear switch 769, it is possible to erase (clear) various information related to games stored in the RAM in the main control board 765.

  A large number of heat radiation holes 230, 231, 232, and 233 are provided in the rear cover body 210, and internal heat is released from these many heat radiation holes 230, 231, 232, and 233. . In this embodiment, the rear cover body 210 is provided with a large number of slit-like heat radiation holes 230 extending from the peripheral wall portion 213 to the rear wall portion 212, and from the substantially middle height position of the rear wall portion 212 to the upper portion. A large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 231 are provided therethrough, and a large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 232 and a predetermined number of horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation holes 233 pass through the rear wall 212. It is installed.

  Further, the horizontally long rectangular heat radiation holes 233 have a size corresponding to the size and arrangement position of a plurality of parallel seal portions 235 sealed by the seal screws (sealing members) of the main control board box 132. It penetrates the position. As a result, even when the opaque rear cover body 210 is closed, the plurality of parallel sealing portions 235 of the main control board box 132 are exposed so as to be visible at the portion of the heat radiation hole 233. For this reason, even when the rear cover body 210 is closed, the sealing state of the sealing portion 235 of the main control board box 132 can be easily visually confirmed. Further, since the opaque synthetic resin material can be easily used as a synthetic resin material that is recycled compared to the transparent synthetic resin material, the rear cover body 210 can be manufactured at low cost.

  Of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, a predetermined position (two places on the left and right in this embodiment) of the upper wall portion 213C is substantially C-shaped to hold a power cord (not shown) in an appropriately folded state. An elastically deformable cord holder 237 extends toward the rear wall surface of the upper tank rail 150 (the rear wall surface of the rail component 139). A knob for removing the power cord by elastically deforming the cord holder 237 is formed at the tip of the cord holder 237.

  One end of the power cord is detachably connected to the board connector 239 of the distribution board 238, and the power plug at the other end is inserted into a power outlet. As described above, the cord holder 237 is integrally formed on the rear cover body 210 and the power cord is held, so that the power cord hangs and gets caught by foreign objects when the pachinko machine is transported and stored. Problems can be prevented.

  Note that an external terminal board 371 is provided below the distribution board 238, and various information (game information) relating to the game of the main control board 765 described later and various information (payout information) relating to the payout of the payout control board 775. Is output to a hall computer (not shown) installed in the hall via the external terminal plate 371. This hall computer monitors the player's game based on these game information and payout information.

[About the configuration of ball derivatives etc. for the lower pan of the rear lower part of the main body frame]
FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the rear cover body 210 and various control boards are removed from the perspective view of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 7, a lower dish ball is provided at the recessed portion of the rear step portion of the speaker box portion 16 at the other side portion (hinge portion) of the rear lower region of the main body frame 3. A derivative 253 is mounted. This lower tray ball derivative 253 is used when the game balls paid out to the upper plate 51 through the upper plate connecting path (not shown) from the award and rental ball passages of the ball dispensing device 170 are full. The game ball on the upper plate communication path is for guiding the game ball to the lower plate 31.

  In this embodiment, a board box 254 that houses the interface board 252 is mounted on the outer surface of the rear wall of the lower plate ball derivative 253. The interface board 252 is interposed between the ball lending machine installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 775, and transmits / receives a signal related to ball lending between the ball lending machine and the payout control board 775. Electrical connection is possible.

[Concerning the specific composition of the Center character]
11 is a perspective view showing the game area 37 from the diagonally upper right front, FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing the game area 37 from the diagonally upper left front, FIG. 13 is a front view showing the center accessory 91, and FIG. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the front unit 120 and the rear unit 121 of the center accessory 91 are separated, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the front unit 120 is separated in functional units. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the rear unit 121 is separated into functional units.

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the center accessory 91 has a frame-like appearance, and is arranged in the center of the game area 37, and the outer peripheral portion extending from the upper side to the right side of the game area 37. It extends to the right edge. In other words, the substantial game area 37 is not formed on the right side of the center accessory 91 so that the game ball does not pass therethrough. Although the size of the center accessory 91 is not particularly limited, in this example, it is constructed as an extremely large accessory that occupies about 2/3 of the entire game area 37.

  The center accessory 91 configured in this way is configured to guide a game ball driven into the game area 37 from a launch port 78a formed above the game area 37 so as to flow down a specific area. Yes. The “specific area” is an area that is approximately two-thirds of the width direction of the game area 37 above the center accessory 91 on the side of the launching rail 19. It is a region between the accessory 91 and the firing rail 19, and below the center accessory 91 is a region on the firing rail 19 side from the vicinity of the discharge port 285. In other words, the game ball is a flow path from the upper side of the game board 37 to the discharge port 285 through the space between the center accessory 91 arranged at the center of the game area 37 and the guide rail.

  The normal symbol starting port 96, the special symbol starting port 82, and the big winning port 141 are arranged in the order of the big winning port 141, the special symbol starting port 82, and the normal symbol starting port 96 from the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball. ing. More specifically, when the game board 5 is divided into three in the vertical direction, the winning prize opening 141 is arranged in the uppermost third region, and the special symbol starting port 82 is the middle third. The symbol starting port 96 is normally arranged in the lowermost third region. Therefore, the game ball that is driven from the launch port 78a toward the game area 37 reaches the winning prize port 141 first, then reaches the special symbol start port 82, and then the normal symbol start port 96.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the center accessory 91 is roughly divided into a front unit 120 disposed on the front side and a rear unit 121 disposed on the rear side. The front unit 120 is disposed in a state of protruding forward from the game area 37 and includes a decorative frame 125 that partitions the game area 37 and the internal space. A guide wall 123 for guiding the game ball is formed on the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative frame 125, and an opening 124 functioning as a display window is provided in the center of the decorative frame 125. It has been.

  The decoration frame 125 has a decoration on the surface, and an upper electric decoration 127 that radiates light according to the effect is arranged at the upper left part, and an upper electric decoration is arranged at the lower right part of the decoration frame 125. A lower electric decoration 128 having a form different from that of the body 127 is provided. Further, on the right side of the decorative frame 125, there is provided a frame electrical decoration body 129 composed of a plurality of light emitting means arranged in an arc shape along the peripheral surface.

  Further, on the upper side of the decorative frame 125, the upper right portion protrudes upward from the upper left portion, and an expansion opening 140 is formed inside thereof. The extended opening 140 functions as a space for accommodating a decorative object 246 and a transverse guide member 247 described later, and is formed in a state of communicating with the opening 124. The guide wall 123 on the left side wall of the expansion opening 140 is provided with a large winning port 141 through which the game ball can be won, penetrating the peripheral surface of the decoration frame 125 and can be opened and closed by the first movable piece 142. It has become. Note that the drawing shows a state in which the big prize opening 141 is closed by the first movable piece 142, and in this state, it is impossible to win the game ball in the big prize opening 141. Then, a game that has won (entered) a region (first game region) inside the big prize opening 141 from an area outside the big prize opening 141 (second game area) by the opening operation by the first movable piece 142. The sphere is guided by a guide passage 143 including a cross guide member 247 and the like, and is sent to a rotary sorter 294 described later.

  Further, an inflow port 144 (see FIG. 12) through which a game ball can enter is provided on the left side surface of the decoration frame 125, and the game ball that has entered from the inflow port 144 is taken into the interior of the decoration frame 125. Is possible. On the inner bottom surface of the decorative frame 125, a winning guide portion 145 for guiding a game ball flowing out from a stage 461 described later toward the normal symbol starting port 96 is provided.

Hereinafter, each of the above-described components assembled to the decorative frame 125 will be described in more detail.
[About the upper electric body 127]
As shown in FIG. 15, the upper electric body 127 is a model of a motorcycle light, and a relatively large headlamp unit 148 capable of emitting light, and small side lamp units 149 disposed on both sides thereof. And a lamp support portion 160 that supports the head lamp portion 148 and the side lamp portion 149. In addition, a decorative cover (not shown) extending rearward from the bottom surface is provided so as to cover these lower portions.

[About the lower illumination body 128]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lower electrical decoration body 128 includes a dial 164 from which a predetermined character (for example, “explosion”) is cut out, a reflector (not shown) disposed behind the dial 164, and light emission Means (not shown). That is, the light of the light emitting means is diffusely reflected by the reflecting plate, and the light on the dial 164 can be illuminated by radiating the light through the character window formed on the dial 164.

[Special electric accessory and its drive mechanism]
The first movable piece 142 that opens and closes the grand prize winning opening 141 is supported so as to be rotated by an opening / closing member drive mechanism 184 disposed behind the upper electric ornament 127. That is, the first movable piece 142 is pivotally supported about a support shaft 185 extending in the front-rear direction, and is turned upright by rotating the support shaft 185 by the opening / closing member drive mechanism 184 ( It can be displaced from a closed state) to an inclined state (open state) or from an inclined state to a standing state. Details of the opening / closing member driving mechanism 184 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 17 is a perspective view showing the first movable piece 142 and the opening / closing member driving mechanism 184 obliquely from the upper left rear, and FIG. 18 is a rear view showing the configuration of the first movable piece 142 and the opening / closing member driving mechanism 184. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view showing a state where the components of the opening / closing member driving mechanism 184 are separated.

  The opening / closing member drive mechanism 184 includes a solenoid 187 disposed so that the tip of the plunger 186 (see FIG. 19) faces downward, and a block-like reciprocating motion that is attached to the tip of the plunger 186 and reciprocates vertically. A member 188, an extending portion 189 extending upward from the rear end portion of the upper surface of the reciprocating member 188 (that is, the rear side of the solenoid 187) and integrally formed with the reciprocating member 188, and reciprocation of the extending portion 189. A link mechanism 204 that transmits the motion to the support shaft 185 of the first movable piece 142 and rotates the support shaft 185 is configured. A pair of flanges 225 projecting left and right outwards are formed on the left and right side surfaces of the reciprocating member 188, and an elongated hole penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction is formed on the upper side of the extending portion 189. 205 is drilled.

  The link mechanism 204 is disposed so that its longitudinal direction is substantially perpendicular to the reciprocating direction of the extending portion 189, and an arm portion whose right end is pivotally supported via the rotation shaft 200. 201, a motion converting member 202 that connects the vicinity of the upper end of the extending portion 189 and the arm portion 201, and converts the linear reciprocating motion of the extending portion 189 into the rotational motion of the arm portion 201, and the distal end side of the arm portion 201 (A left end portion) and a support shaft 185 of the first movable piece 142 are connected to each other, and a binocular-shaped rotation transmission member 203 that transmits the rotation movement of the arm unit 201 to the support shaft 185 is configured. The motion conversion member 202 is coupled between a pivotal support portion of the arm portion 201 (that is, a portion to which the rotational shaft 200 is connected) and a portion to which the rotational transmission member 203 is coupled. The rotation transmitting member 203 is connected to the arm portion 201 via a connecting pin 206 and extends from the tip of the arm portion 201 toward the inside (rightward direction). The motion conversion member 202 is inserted into a long hole 205 formed in the upper part of the extension part 189, and when the extension part 189 reciprocates linearly, it slides in the left-right direction according to the angle of the arm part 201. It comes to move. That is, it is possible to convert the reciprocating linear motion of the extending portion 189 into the rotational motion of the arm portion 201 without changing the position of the connection point with respect to the arm portion 201. The extension portion 189 and the solenoid 187 are disposed between the rotation shaft 200 of the arm portion 201 and the support shaft 185 of the first movable piece 142, and are the length in the vertical direction of the opening / closing member drive mechanism 184. Is configured to be shorter.

  By the way, the opening / closing member drive mechanism 184 has a substrate 183 (see FIG. 15) to which a solenoid 187 is attached, and a through hole 208 through which the solenoid 187 and the reciprocating member 188 are inserted, and covers the entire substrate 183 from the rear side. The first case 209, a cylindrical first bearing portion 220 that protrudes from the outer surface of the first case 209 and is inserted into one end of the rotary shaft 200, and passes through the first case 209 and the first case. And a second bearing part 221 through which the support shaft 185 is inserted. That is, the rotation shaft 200 is supported by the first bearing portion 220 formed in the first case 209, and the support shaft 185 of the first movable piece 142 is supported by the second bearing portion 221. Further, a plurality of attachment portions 222 for fixing the first case 209 to the back surface of the decorative frame 125 are formed on the periphery on the front side of the first case 209 so as to protrude.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, guide portions 223 formed to protrude rearward from the outer surface of the first case 209 are provided on the left and right peripheral edges of the through hole 208 in the first case 209. The inner dimension of the guide portion 223 in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the outer dimension between the pair of flanges 225 formed on both side surfaces of the reciprocating member 188 (strictly speaking, slightly larger than the outer dimension). The inner surface of the guide portion 223 comes into contact with the side surface of the flange 225. That is, the left and right movements of the reciprocating member 188 are restricted by the pair of left and right guide portions 223 and are slid only in the vertical direction.

  A transparent second case 224 (see FIG. 19) that covers the entire opening / closing member drive mechanism 184 is assembled to the outer surface of the first case 209, and projects into the through hole 208 from the front side of the guide portion 223. The flange 225 is sandwiched in the front-rear direction by the support portion 223a and the distal end surface of the second case 224. That is, the back-and-forth movement of the reciprocating member 188 is also restricted using the first case 209 and the second case 224. A harness latching piece 226 for binding a plurality of harnesses (not shown) connected to the board is disposed on the back surface of the second case 224.

[About the guide passage 143]
The guide passage 143 disposed in the decoration frame 125 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 20 to 23. 20 is an enlarged perspective view showing the configuration of the guide passage 143, FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the configurations of the guide passage 143 and the decoration 246, and FIG. 22 is an AA cross section and a BB cross section in FIG. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration in the vicinity of the discharge port of the guide passage 143.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 20, the guide passage 143 is made of a transparent tubular member disposed so as to have substantially the same protruding amount as the decoration frame 125, and decorates the game ball won in the grand prize winning opening 141. A transverse guide member 247 that traverses in front of the object 246, and a circumferential guide that guides a game ball guided by the transverse guide member 247 along the inner peripheral surface of the decorative frame 125 in communication with the downstream end of the transverse guide member 247 An inward guide portion 281 that communicates with the portion 280 and the downstream end of the peripheral surface guide portion 280 and guides the game ball guided by the peripheral surface guide portion 280 in a substantially horizontal direction toward the center side of the decorative frame 125; A back direction guide portion 284 that communicates with the inward direction guide portion 281 and guides the game ball guided by the inward direction guide portion 281 toward the back side of the decoration frame 125, and is integrally formed. It has been.

  The crossing guide member 247 crosses the inside of the extended opening 140 of the decorative frame 125, and is arranged to be slightly inclined so that the right side is downward. Further, the crossing guide member 247 extends substantially linearly, and a passage having a size through which a game ball passes is formed therein. The crossing guide member 247 is formed of a transparent member, and the game ball passing through the inside and the ornament 246 disposed behind the crossing guide member 247 can be visually recognized through the crossing guide member 247. It is possible.

  The circumferential surface guiding portion 280 has a depth substantially equal to the thickness in the front-rear direction of the decorative frame 125, and includes a plurality of direction changing portions that change the flowing game balls in a zigzag shape in the front-rear direction. 282 is formed. That is, the game balls guided by the circumferential surface guiding portion 280 flow down in a zigzag manner in the front-rear direction, so that the lengths of the passages are compared even when the vertical length of the circumferential surface guiding portion 280 is relatively short. It is possible to fully enjoy the behavior of the game ball. In addition, although the shape and arrangement | sequence of the direction conversion part 282 are not specifically limited, In this example, the several direction conversion part 282 which exhibits the external appearance of a cross-sectional substantially triangular shape pointed inward in the height direction. On the other hand, it protrudes alternately from the front inner surface and the rear inner surface facing each other so as to form a staggered pattern. In addition, a semi-cylindrical protrusion 283 that slightly protrudes from the front inner surface or the rear inner surface is provided at the upstream base portion of each direction changing portion 282, thereby suppressing the flow-down speed of the game ball. .

  The inward guide portion 281 extends in a substantially horizontal direction toward the center side of the decoration frame 125 and, like the transverse guide member 247, the decoration frame 125 has substantially the same protruding amount as the decoration frame 125. It is arranged only on the front side. That is, it is formed in a substantially linear shape, and a passage having a size through which a game ball passes is formed inside. In addition, on the front inner surface and the rear inner surface of the inward guide portion 281, like the circumferential guide portion 280, semi-cylindrical protrusions 283 are arranged at a constant interval to suppress the flow velocity of the game ball. Like to do. However, the inward guide portion 281 is not provided with a portion corresponding to the direction changing portion 282.

  The back direction guiding portion 284 is a linear member extending from the front side to the back side of the decoration frame 125, and a discharge port 285 for discharging the game ball is provided on the back surface of the back direction guiding portion 284. ing. That is, the game ball guided near the front surface of the decorative frame 125 until it reaches the back direction guiding portion 284 is guided backward by the back direction guiding portion 284. By configuring in this way, a player who sees from the front can see the game ball as if it has stopped for a moment. In particular, since the bottom surface of the back direction guiding portion 284 is suspended from the bottom surface of the inward direction guiding portion 281, when the inward direction guiding portion 281 and the back direction guiding portion 284 are viewed from the front, the front view is a faucet of water supply It becomes like a bowl. For this reason, it is possible to guide the game ball in the back direction while making it appear that the game ball guided by the inward guide portion 281 flows out from the bottom surface of the back direction guide portion 284. Therefore, it is possible to evoke a sense that the game ball is stopped more strongly.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, a projection 286 having a downward slope is formed on the inner bottom surface of the back direction guiding portion 284, and the momentum of the game ball is weakened in the back direction guiding portion 284. Even if it is too much, the projection 286 can guide the game ball backward.

  As shown in FIG. 23, on the downstream side of the back direction guide unit 284, the game ball discharged from the back direction guide unit 284 is received and guided to a predetermined sorting device 321 (details will be described later). A passage 369 is disposed. Here, the discharge port 285 of the back direction guiding portion 284 is disposed at a position higher than the entrance of the guide passage 369, and a stepped portion 288 is formed between the exit 285 and the entrance. . That is, by providing a step, the game ball is prevented from flowing backward from the guide passage 369 into the back direction guiding portion 284.

  By the way, in this example, even when the game ball wins the big winning opening 141 vigorously, the transverse guiding member 247 and the big winning opening 141 are arranged so that the gaming ball can roll slowly in the cross guiding member 247. A speed reduction member 248 that suppresses the momentum of the game ball that has won the grand prize winning opening 141 is interposed between the two. As shown in FIG. 22, the speed reducing member 248 communicates with the rear guide portion 260 that guides the game ball that has won the prize winning opening 141 rearward, and the rear guide portion 260 to slightly forward the game ball diagonally forward. It consists of a lowering guide part 261 that drops and a front guide part 262 that communicates with the lowering guide part 261 and guides the game ball forward. The rear guide portion 260 and the lowering guide portion 261 are formed by a guide passage forming member different from the guide passage 143, and the front guide portion 262 is formed integrally with the transverse guide member 247 at the tip of the guide passage 143. .

  The descending guide part 261 is provided with a winning state detecting means 263 for detecting a game ball won in the big winning opening 141, and a signal line for outputting a detection signal from the winning state detecting means 263 is provided. In addition, it is connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the lowering guide portion 261.

  Further, in this example, a shielding cover 264 (see FIG. 14) for shielding the speed reduction member 248 from the front is attached to the front surface of the decoration frame 125, and temporarily blocks the game ball won in the big winning opening 141. This enhances the feeling of excitement when a game ball appears on the crossing guide member 247. Further, the winning state detecting means 263 is shielded by the shielding cover 264 to prevent the appearance from deteriorating. The shielding cover 264 functions as a part of the decorative frame 125, and is configured such that the entire shielding cover 264 is illuminated by light emitting means (not shown) arranged behind the decoration frame 125.

[Schematic configuration of rear unit 121]
On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 16, the rear unit 121 is arranged at the upper right of the frame-shaped rear frame 292 having an opening 291 through which the effect display device 115 can be visually recognized, and the rear frame 292. A decorative object 246 simulating the shape, a composite guiding device 293 that is arranged on the right side of the rear frame 292 and distributes and guides the gaming ball guided by the guide passage 143, and a gaming ball guided by the composite guiding device 293 A rotary sorter 294 that sorts the game balls by a rotating body, a rolling device 295 that is arranged on the lower side of the rear frame 292 and can roll a game ball in the left-right direction, and a game that flows into the inflow port 144 A guidance device 296 that guides the ball to the rolling device 295, and a mail device that is arranged behind the rolling device 295 to visually recognize a motorcycle speedometer. It is configured by including a display device 297. In addition, a transparent partition plate 298 that closes the opening 291 is provided in the opening 291 of the rear frame 292, and the rolling device 295 and the meter display device 297 are partitioned by the partition plate 298. Hereinafter, each component in the rear unit 121 will be described in detail.

[About the rear frame 292]
The rear frame 292 is a substantially quadrangular frame-shaped member whose front surface is open, and includes a plate-like back plate 300 in which an opening 291 is formed, and a side plate 301 that extends forward from the periphery of the back plate 300. It consists of and. That is, each of the above-described components is formed in a box shape so as to be accommodated in the rear frame 292. Although not shown, a guide passage component for guiding a winning game ball or a discharged game ball to a predetermined portion is assembled around the rear frame 292, particularly on the left side and the lower right side. It is supposed to be.

[About the decoration 246]
The decoration object 246 is disposed at a position corresponding to the expansion opening 140 in the decoration frame 125, that is, in a space behind the transverse guide member 247. The ornament 246 generates a rotational force and a ornament main body 302 that is a model of a motorcycle, a support shaft portion (not shown) that rotatably supports the ornament main body 302 so that a front wheel of the ornament main body 302 is lifted. And a link mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the rotation of the decoration motor 303 to the support shaft portion and rotating the support shaft portion. That is, the ornament main body 302 is a movable accessory that fluctuates based on the gaming state. For example, when the expected value for the lottery increases, the ornament motor 303 is driven to lift the front wheels from the normal traveling state. Switch to the state. A background decoration plate 304 (see FIG. 13) is provided behind the decoration main body 302 as a background of the decoration main body 302, and an uneven pattern having a decorative property is formed on the surface of the background decoration plate 304. Has been.

[About compound guidance device 293]
A specific configuration of the composite guiding device 293 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 is a perspective view showing the composite guiding device 293 and the rotary sorting device 294, FIG. 25 is a front view showing the composite guiding device 293 and the rotary sorting device 294, and FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view showing a cross section C, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view mainly showing a configuration in the vicinity of the sorting apparatus 321, FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view showing a DD cross section in FIG. 25, and FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the EE cross section in.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the composite guiding device 293 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a cylindrical member 306 disposed so that the axial center direction is substantially vertical, and in a spiral shape within the cylindrical member 306. An inner guide passage 308 for guiding the game ball to the predetermined first region 307, an outer guide passage 320 formed in a spiral shape along the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical member 306, and guides the game ball to the predetermined second region 309; A distribution device 321 is provided that distributes the game balls guided by the guide passage 143, that is, the game balls won in the big prize opening 141, into the inner guide passage 308 and the outer guide passage 320. In other words, the game balls guided by the guide passage 143 are distributed to the inner guide passage 308 and the outer guide passage 320 by the sorting device 321, and turn along the spiral paths, respectively. It is guided to the area 307 and the second area 309. In particular, since the two guide passages 308 and 320 partitioned from each other are configured in an inner and outer double shape and formed in a spiral shape, two relatively long paths partitioned from each other can be obtained without increasing the size of the apparatus. It becomes possible to build.

  Further, the cylindrical member 306, the inner guide passage 308, and the outer guide passage 320 are all formed of a transparent resin member, and the behavior of the game ball passing through the inner guide passage 308 and the outer guide passage 320, that is, turning. It is possible to make it visible.

  Further, the spiral direction in the inner guide passage 308 and the spiral direction in the outer guide passage 320 are formed in opposite directions. That is, the rolling direction of the game ball in the inner guide passage 308 and the rolling direction of the game ball in the outer guide passage 320 are opposite to each other. For this reason, it is possible to easily grasp which passage is being passed, and it is possible to enhance the fun of the production by the game balls rolling in opposite directions.

  Although the details will be described later, the second area 309 is an area that is more advantageous for the player than the first area 307, and particularly pays attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the outer guide passage 320. Like that. That is, the outer guidance path 320 that enables the player to clearly recognize the presence of the game ball is set as a path that should be noticed by the player, thereby increasing interest in the outer guidance path 320. Further, since the outer guide passage 320 that leads toward the advantageous second region 309 is a longer route, it is possible to gradually increase the sense of expectation and be excited about the subsequent development.

  In addition, a plurality of protrusions 325 that suppress the flow-down speed of the game ball are formed on the inner surface of the outer guide passage 320 at a predetermined interval. For this reason, when passing through the highly advantageous outer guide passage 320, the game ball collides with the plurality of protrusions 325, the momentum of the game ball is suppressed, and the game ball rolls slowly. Therefore, the behavior of the game ball can be made sufficiently visible, and the relationship between the processing performed in the second area 309 and the timing sent to the second area 309 can be throbbing.

  By the way, the outlet 327 of the outer guide passage 320 is disposed on the lower front side of the outer guide passage 320. For this reason, the behavior and the discharge timing when flowing out from the outer guide passage 320 to the second region 309 can be clearly seen. In particular, a crune 326 is provided in the vicinity of the outlet 327 of the outer guide passage 320 and is configured to be discharged while being swung along a funnel-shaped slope. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the discharge timing until the end, and it becomes possible to make the discharge timing more irritating.

  On the other hand, on the outflow side of the inner guide passage 308, as shown in FIG. 29, an extension outflow passage 329 is provided in which the passage to the outflow port 340 extends rearward. Is configured to be located behind the outer guide passage 320. Thus, by providing the extended outflow passage 329, even when the spiral diameters of the inner guide passage 308 and the outer guide passage 320 are relatively small, the outlet 340 of the inner guide passage 308 and the outlet of the outer guide passage 320 are provided. 328 can be separated from each other, and a relatively large accessory or the like can be disposed in the first region 307 and the second region 309.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the inlet 341a of the inner guide passage 308 is formed at the tip of the inflow passage 341 extending to the left side of the sorting device 321, and the inlet 342a of the outer guide passage 320 is formed. Is formed at the tip of an inflow passage 342 extending to the right side of the sorting device 321.

  The allocating device 321 includes a swing piece 363 that is pivotally supported, a solenoid 365 that reciprocally moves the plunger, and a crank that converts the reciprocating linear motion of the plunger into a swing motion of the swing piece 363. And a mechanism 366. Further, the guide passage 369 for guiding the game ball to the sorting device 321 is formed in a bowl shape, receives the game ball discharged from the rear end of the back direction guiding portion 284 and guides it backward, and then It is formed in a U shape so as to be U-turned and guided right above the swing piece 363. That is, the solenoid 365 is configured to flow out from the left side toward the front swing piece 363. Then, the swing piece 363 causes the game ball that has flowed out from the rear side toward the swing piece 363 to the inlet 341a of the inner guide passage 308 disposed on the left side due to the upper surface gradient of the swing piece 363, and It is configured to be distributed to the inlet 342a of the outer guide passage 320 arranged on the right side. Accordingly, the distribution situation can be clearly seen and the game balls discharged from the rear to the front are distributed to the left and right, so that the swinging pieces 363 can be smoothly distributed without being rebounded. it can.

  A decorative partition plate 380 whose surface is mirror-finished is provided between the swing piece 363 and the solenoid 365, and the solenoid 365 and the crank mechanism 366 are shielded by the decorative partition plate 380. Further, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the front side of the sorting device 321 is covered with a transparent case 382, and the upper portion of the guide passage 369 is covered with a transparent cover (not shown). That is, by providing the case 382 and the cover, the game ball is prevented from escaping and entering from the outside.

  Further, an electrical decoration unit 381 having two light emitting units alternately flashing is provided on the lower front side of the swing piece 363, thereby improving design and distributing game balls to two paths. I try to arouse that.

[Rotary sorter 294]
Next, the rotary sorter 294 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24, 26, and FIGS. 30 is a plan view showing the configuration of the rotary sorter 294, FIG. 31 is a plan view showing a state in which the rotating body 347 is removed, and FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing the FF cross section in FIG. FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view showing a GG cross section in FIG. 30.

  As shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 30, the rotary sorter 294 is advantageous in that the game ball guided by the inner guide passage 308 or the outer guide passage 320 of the composite guide device 293 is used with the rotating body 347. And the disadvantageous state. The rotary sorter 294 has a concave specific area 344, a normal area 345, and a return area 346, a disk-shaped rotary body 347 that is rotatably supported, and a rotary body drive unit that rotates the rotary body 347. 343 and a rotating body case 384 having an outer peripheral wall 385 that surrounds the rotating body 347.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 31, on the upper surface of the rotating body case 384, an inflow port 367 that temporarily communicates with the specific area 344, the normal area 345, and the return area 346 as the rotating body 347 rotates, A guide passage 349 that guides the game ball guided by the inner guide passage 308 to the inflow port 367, a return outflow port 389 that causes the game ball that has entered the return region 346 to flow out from the return region 346, and outflow from the return outflow port 389 A return passage 400 is formed for returning the game ball to the inflow port 367 again. Furthermore, a first outlet (special area) through which a game ball that has entered the specific area 344 flows out of the specific area (guide section) 344 on the bottom surface of the rotary body accommodating section 384 a that accommodates the rotating body 347 in the rotating body case 384. 388 and the 2nd outflow port 387 which flows out the game ball which entered the normal area | region 345 from the normal area | region 345 are formed. The first outlet 388 is provided with a game ball detecting means (V winning sensor 331) for detecting that a game ball has flowed out of the first outlet 388, and the game ball is detected by the game ball detecting means. In the case of being played, the special game is performed.

Hereinafter, each component in the rotary sorter 294 will be described in detail.
The rotating body 347 has a shade shape in which the central portion is the highest and gradually decreases toward the periphery, and at the periphery, one specific area 344 that opens along the outer periphery, and the rotation of the rotating body 347. One return region 346 formed at a position facing the specific region 344 with the shaft 405 as the center, and six normal regions 345 formed at equal intervals between the rotating body 347 and the return region 346 are provided. Yes. That is, the phase difference between the specific region 344 and the return region 346 is 180 °, and three normal regions 345 are arranged on the line object with the line connecting these regions 344 and 346 as a boundary line. Through holes through which the game balls can be discharged are formed on the bottom surfaces of the respective regions 344, 345, and 346, and the game balls are discharged by a combination of the through holes and the bottom surface of the rotating body housing portion 384a The state where it does not flow is switched. Specifically, the through hole in the specific region 344 is formed at a position that matches the first outlet 388 formed on the bottom surface of the rotating body accommodating portion 384a and does not match the second outlet 387. The through hole in the region 345 is formed at a position that matches the second outlet 387 formed on the bottom surface of the rotating body accommodating portion 384 a and does not match the first outlet 388. Here, “match” indicates a state where the game balls are communicated with each other at least so that the game ball can be discharged. A small game ball is not allowed to pass through. Therefore, when a game ball enters the specific area 344, the game ball rotates together with the rotating body 347 and flows out from the first outlet 388 when the specific area 344 matches the first outlet 388. In addition, when a game ball enters the normal area 345, the game ball rotates together with the rotating body 347, and flows out from the second outlet 387 when the normal area 345 matches the second outlet 387. . Note that a V winning sensor 331 (see FIG. 41) is disposed at the first outlet 388, and the V winning sensor 331 detects that a game ball has flowed out of the specific area 344. Further, a discharge sensor 313 (see FIG. 41) is disposed at the second outlet 387, and the discharge sensor 313 detects that a game ball has flowed out of the normal area 345.

  In addition, arc-shaped outflow prevention walls 408 that prevent the game balls from flowing out from the respective regions 344 and 345 in the radial direction are formed on the outer peripheral edges of the specific region 344 and the normal region 345. In other words, even if the specific region 344 and the normal region 345 coincide with the return outlet 389 formed in the rotating body case 384, the bank is formed so as not to flow out to the return outlet 389. In other words, the through hole in the return region 346 does not match both the first outlet 388 and the second outlet 387, but the outflow prevention wall 408 is not provided on the outer peripheral edge. When it matches with 389, it flows out from the return outlet 389.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the bottom surface of the return outlet 389 is formed at a position lower than the top surface of the outflow prevention wall 408 and has a downward slope toward the return passage 400. When 345 matches the return outlet 389, the outflow prevention wall 408 becomes effective, and it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from flowing out from the specific area 344 and the normal area 345. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, the bottom surface of the inflow port 367 is formed at a position higher than the top surface of the outflow prevention wall 408. For this reason, the outflow prevention wall 408 becomes ineffective at the inflow port 367, and it becomes possible to allow a game ball to enter from all the areas open to the entire area regardless of the presence or absence of the outflow prevention wall 408.

  In this way, the game ball that has reached the inflow port 367 is allowed to flow toward the specific area 344, the normal area 345, or the return area 346 of the rotating body 347. That is, even if the game ball reaches the inflow port 367, the game ball waits at that position until the inflow port 367 communicates with the specific region 344, the normal region 345, or the return region 346 in the rotating body 347, and the rotation of the rotating body 347. When the communication is temporarily made, the ball enters the specific area 344, the normal area 345, or the return area 346, and rotates around the axis together with the rotating body 347. Then, the game ball that has entered the specific area 344 flows out from the first outlet 388, and the game medium that has entered the normal area 345 flows out from the second outlet 387. Further, the special game is performed based on the game ball flowing out from the specific area 344.

  On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the return area 346 flows out from the return outlet 389 and then returns to the inlet 367 through the return passage 400. That is, even if it is not possible to enter the specific area 344, if the player enters the return area 346, the opportunity to enter the specific area 344 is given again, so that the player feels And increase the willingness to play.

  In particular, the return path 400 for returning the game ball to the inflow port 367 is configured as a path different from the guide path 349. For this reason, the behavior of the game ball until it first reaches the inflow port 367 and the behavior of the game ball when it reaches the inflow port 367 can be made different from each other, and the monotony of the distribution is reduced by the different behavior. can do. In particular, the return passage 400 is formed along the outer periphery of the rotating body 347, and the guide passage 349 is disposed outside the return passage 400 and is formed substantially in parallel with the return passage 400. For this reason, the return passage 400 can communicate the return outlet 389 and the inlet 367 with the shortest distance, and suppresses the feeling of irritation caused by the behavior of the game ball in the vicinity of the rotating body 347 becoming longer than necessary. Can do. Also, two game balls can be rolled side by side, and dynamic behavior can be brought out.

  In addition, a holding device (temporary holding device) 360 is interposed in the guide passage 349, and a game ball passing through the guide passage (normal route) 349 is temporarily stopped on the guide passage 349, and then a predetermined amount is set. It can be released at the timing. When a plurality of game balls are guided to the inner guide passage 308, the holding device 360 includes a ball housing unit (stop unit) 406 for stopping only one of the game balls, and among the game balls A discharge unit 410 that discharges only the game balls that are not stopped by the ball storage unit 406 from the center accessory 91. In other words, the holding device 360 according to this embodiment has a holding position in which the ball housing portion 406 is perpendicular to the guide passage 349 and can hold a game ball, and a game held in parallel with the guide passage 349. The holding drive mechanism 338 (see FIG. 41) is configured to rotate between an open position where only the sphere can flow out to the rotating body 347. Note that game balls overflowing from the holding device 360 (game balls that are not stopped by the ball storage unit 406) are guided to the discharge unit 410 when the ball storage unit 406 is moved from the holding position to the release position. From the inside of the center accessory 91 through the discharge path 407. As described above, the holding device 360 is interposed in the guide passage 349, so that even when a plurality of game balls are entered in the center accessory 91, the game balls are entered in the specific area 344. It is possible to favorably maintain the probability.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the main control MPU 765a (see FIG. 41), which will be described later, stores a plurality of stop time information indicating different times as stop times in which the game balls are stopped by the holding device 360 in the internal RAM or the like. When releasing the stop, one of the plurality of stop time information is determined. When the stop time indicated by the determined stop time information has elapsed, the holding drive mechanism 338 is driven to release the game ball from being held by the holding device 360. That is, in this case, the game ball that has entered the center accessory 91 is stopped at the holding device 360 for a different stopping time each time. For this reason, the time from when the game ball enters the center accessory 91 until it reaches the rotating body 347 is irregular, and the player has the highest probability of entering the specific area 344. It becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the special symbol start port 82 aiming at the point.

  Further, since the holding device 360 is not provided in the return passage 400, the game ball can be smoothly rolled even if the inclination of the return passage 400 is relatively gentle. In addition, since the ball storage unit 406 is provided in the holding device 360, the number of game balls that can enter the specific area 344 of the rotator 347 even if the number of game balls to be awarded to the big prize opening 141 is increased. Can be limited. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden at the game store while increasing the player's expectation due to winning.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 24, as a path for entering a game ball into each area of the rotator 347, when entering the ball from the inflow port 367 via the inner guide path 308 (normal path), the outer guide path There is a case where it is directly supplied to the upper surface of the rotating body 347 via 320 (a special route). On the upper surface of the rotator 347, a ball entry restriction wall 421 is provided for restricting the number of normal areas 345 in which game balls can enter. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, four U-shaped entrance restriction walls 421 are provided so as to surround the four ordinary areas 345 out of the six ordinary areas 345. It is possible to enter only one normal area 345, a specific area 344 and a return area 346. That is, when guided to the upper surface of the rotator 347, which is the second region 309, by the outer guide passage 320, the normal region 345 where the ball can enter is greater than when guided to the inlet 367 by the inner guide passage 308. And the probability of entering the specific area 344 or the return area 346 increases. In other words, the expected value at which the special game is performed is increased.

  By the way, the return outlet 389 is formed in the outer peripheral wall 385 behind and inward of the inlet 367. Then, by forming the return outlet 389 at a position higher than the inlet 367, the return passage 400 can be formed in a downward slope toward the downstream side, and the game ball that has flowed out of the return outlet 389. Can be returned to nature using its own weight. However, when the return outlet 389 is formed at a position higher than the inlet 367, it is necessary to lift the game ball that has entered the return area 346 to a higher position, and the mechanism of the rotating body 347 becomes complicated or large. There is a risk of becoming. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 26, the rotating shaft 405 of the rotating body 347 is suspended from the rotating body 347 and tilted forward so that the upper end is positioned in front of the lower end. I support it. That is, by tilting the upper surface of the rotator 347 forward, the height of the rear side of the rotator 347 is made higher than the height of the front side, and the game ball that has entered the return area 346 from the inflow port 367 The rotational force of 347 is used to lift the return outlet 389 higher than the inlet 367. Further, according to this, since the upper surface of the rotating body 347 is inclined to the front side, a state in which a game medium enters the respective areas from the inflow port 367 and a state in which the game medium flows out from the return outflow port 389 to the return passage 400 is illustrated. Thus, it becomes possible to make it clearly visible, and an effective production using the rotating body 347 can be easily performed.

  The rotating body driving means 343 that rotates the rotating shaft 405 transmits the rotation of the motor 422 that generates rotational force and the rotation of the motor 422 to the rotating shaft 405 of the rotating body 347, and the rotating body 347 is transmitted in a certain direction (in this example, a plan view clock). (Rotation direction), the support mechanism 423 that supports the transmission mechanism 423, the motor 422, and the rotating body case 384 and supports the rotating shaft 405 of the rotating body 347 in a rotatable manner, and the rotating body 347 is always rotated and rotated. There is provided speed switching means 409 (see FIG. 41) for periodically switching the rotational speed of the shaft 405 to a different speed.

  By the way, when the speed of the rotating body 347 is always constant, there is a possibility that the game ball flowing out from the return outlet 389 may always enter the same area when returning to the inlet 367. Before returning to the inflow port 367 and further when entering the return area 346, it is possible to know which area to return to, and there is a possibility that the interest of providing the return area 346 is reduced by half. On the other hand, in this example, the speed switching means 409 is provided and is configured to periodically change the rotational speed of the rotating body 347. For this reason, it is possible to change the area in which the game ball that has returned to the inflow port 367 through the return passage 400 can enter at any time. As a result, when the player enters the return area 346, You can focus on the behavior of the sphere.

  In particular, the speed switching unit 409 determines that the time required for the game ball flowing out from the return region 346 to reach the inlet 367 through the return passage 400 after the return region 346 matches the return outlet 389 has elapsed. The rotational speed of the rotator 347 is periodically changed to a speed different from the normal speed. More specifically, the speed switching means 409 uses the position where the return region 346 matches the return outlet 389 as a reference point when rotating the rotating body 347, and the rotating body 347 is n times a half rotation (n is an integer) : “4” in this example) High-speed rotation mode in which high-speed rotation is performed until rotation, and then low-speed rotation is performed until the rotating body 347 rotates m times half a rotation (m is an integer: “1” in this example). A low-speed rotation mode, and a high-speed rotation mode and a low-speed rotation mode are alternately repeated.

  As a result, the angular velocity of the rotating body 347 that rotates until the game ball that has flowed out from the return region 346 reaches the inlet 367 again can be changed reliably, and the region where the ball can enter again. Can be switched periodically. In addition, once the rotation speed is switched, the rotation speed is continued until it rotates at least 180 degrees. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the rotation speed of the rotation body 347 changes, and the speed of the rotation body 347 and the specific region 344. It is possible to predict the whereabouts of the game ball in association with the possibility of entering the ball. In other words, it is possible to pay attention to the rotation speed of the rotating body 347, and it is possible to further enhance the interest in the distribution. In this case, the probability that the game ball that has flowed out of the return area 346 enters the specific area 344 is determined by the ratio between the high-speed rotation mode and the low-speed rotation mode. For example, as in this example, the high-speed rotation When the ratio of the mode to the low-speed rotation mode is 4: 1 and set to enter the specific area 344 in the low-speed rotation mode, the probability that the game ball that has flowed out from the return area 346 enters the specific area 344 Is 1/5. That is, if it is assumed that all the game balls that have won the big winning opening 141 reach the inlet 367 through the guide passage 349, the probability that the game balls that have reached the inlet 367 will enter the return area 346 is 1/8. Thus, 1/5 (1/40 of the whole) enters the specific area 344.

  That is, in this embodiment, the rotating body 347 has a specific area (guide portion) 344 for guiding the game ball to the first outlet (special area) 388, and the specific area 344 is defined as the center accessory 91. It has a structure in which it is constantly displaced with a predetermined operation mode (periodic rotational motion). The rotating body 347 determines whether or not the game ball is distributed to the first outlet 388 of the first outlet (special area) 388 and the second outlet (losing area) 387 through such an operation mode. Is provided as a device for performing the sort of lottery (mechanical lottery device).

[About the rolling device 295 and the guidance device 296]
As shown in FIG. 14, a stage 461 is provided on the lower front side of the rear frame 292 to drop the game ball while swinging in the left-right direction. The stage 461 has a rolling surface on the back side and a rolling surface on the near side, and a ball outlet port 461a is provided at the center of the rolling surface on the near side. The ball outlet 461a communicates with a winning guide 145 formed on the decoration frame 125, and when a game ball rolled on the stage 461 is released from the center of the ball outlet 461a, the winning guide 145 is passed, and the possibility of entering the normal symbol starting port 96 is increased. Note that the stage 461 is made of a translucent member and is configured to emit light from a light emitting means (not shown) disposed below the stage 461 from the stage 461.

  On the other hand, the guide device 296 guides a game ball that has entered from an inflow port 144 (see FIG. 12) formed on the peripheral surface of the decorative frame 125 to the stage 461, and in this example, the guide device 296 is formed in a coil shape. The passage forming member 296a is arranged in the vertical direction, and the inflow port 144 and the stage 461 are communicated with each other. That is, the passage forming member 296a has a spiral shape, and guides the game ball to the stage 461 while rotating the game ball in a spiral shape. The passage forming member 296a is attached to a closing member 424 that closes the inner left side surface of the rear frame 292 and is held in a standing state. Note that a fine uneven pattern is formed on the surface of the closing member 424 and also functions as a shielding plate.

[About meter display device 297]
Next, the meter display device 297 will be described based on FIG. 14, FIG. 34 and FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing the meter display device 297 from the upper right rear, and FIG. 35 is a perspective view showing the meter display 297 from the upper right front. The meter display device 297 is housed in the lower part of the rear frame 292 and supported so as to be lifted and lowered, and when lifted, the display frame part 429 that appears in the opening 291 and a lifting mechanism that lifts and lowers the display frame part 429. 440.

  More specifically, the display frame portion 429 has a pair of annular window frames 448 arranged in the left-right direction, and has a shape imitating a casing of a motorcycle speedometer. Between the pair of window frames 448, a first electric decoration unit 449 that emits light irrespective of the effect display device 115 is provided, and an annular second electric decoration unit 460 is provided around each window frame 448. It has been. The first electrical decoration unit 449 has a plurality of display windows separated in the vertical direction, and the number of display windows that emit light is switched based on the gaming state. In addition, the 1st electrical decoration part 449 and the 2nd electrical decoration part 460 are lighted only when the display frame part 429 appears, and are extinguished when immersed.

  The elevating mechanism 440 includes a base member 466 fixedly attached to the rear frame 292, a pair of left and right lower elongated holes 467 that are horizontally long in the base member 466, and a display frame portion 429. A pair of left and right upper elongated holes 468 that are perforated in the vicinity of the bottom surface in the front-rear direction, an X-shaped link mechanism 469 that pivotally supports the intersection 503, and a lower end of the link mechanism 469 project in the front-rear direction. A pair of lower support pins 480 inserted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the respective lower long holes 467, and project from the upper end of the link mechanism 469 in the front-rear direction, and the respective upper long holes 468. The display frame portion 429 is moved up and down by moving up and down the pair of upper support pins 481 inserted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and the crossing portion 503 of the link mechanism 469. And a moving means 482 Prefecture.

  In particular, the base member 466 includes a bottom surface portion 486 provided with a lower elongated hole portion 467 and a pair of side wall portions 487 erected from both left and right ends of the bottom surface portion 486, and the display frame portion 429 is provided inside. A storage chamber is formed to be capable of storing the battery. Further, a guide portion 488 that guides the movable direction of the display frame portion 429 in the vertical direction is provided on the inner side surface of the side wall portion 487. The lift drive means 482 includes a meter motor 489 that generates a rotational force, and a motion conversion mechanism such as a pinion 500 and a rack 501 that convert the rotation of the meter motor 489 into a linear motion.

  Therefore, when the crossing portion 503 of the link mechanism 469 is lifted by the elevating drive means 482, the X-shaped link mechanism 469 has an interval (a horizontal interval) between the pair of lower support pins 480 and the pair of upper support pins 481. The width of the lower support pin 480 and the upper support pin 481 (the length in the height direction of the link mechanism 469) is increased so as to become narrower. That is, the display frame portion 429 is raised by being deformed so as to extend in the height direction. At this time, the display frame portion 429 can be displaced by amplifying the displacement of the intersecting portion 503. Specifically, in this example, since the position of the crossing portion 503 in the link mechanism 469 is at an intermediate portion between the upper end and the lower end, the displacement amount of the upper support pin 481 is approximately twice the displacement amount of the crossing portion 503. In other words, even when the stroke of the rack 501 in the elevating drive means 482 is relatively short, the display frame portion 429 can be displaced by a length twice as long as the stroke. Further, since the display frame portion 429 is supported by the X-shaped link mechanism 469, the display frame portion 429 can be moved up and down stably. In addition, a guide portion 488 that guides the movable direction of the display frame portion 429 in the vertical direction is provided on the inner surface of the side wall portion 487 in the base member 466, so that the display frame portion 429 can be smoothly raised and lowered. It becomes.

  As described above, the display frame portion 429 that is supported so as to be lifted is accommodated in the lower portion of the rear frame 292. When the display frame portion 429 is lifted by the lifting mechanism 440, the display frame portion 429 is placed in the opening 291. Appears on. Since the display frame portion 429 is provided with a pair of annular window frames 448, when the display frame portion 429 appears in the opening 291 of the rear frame 292, the display screen of the effect display device 115 is visually recognized through the inside of the window frame 448. It becomes possible to make it. In particular, an effect display control means 443 (see FIG. 50) is provided, and when the display frame portion 429 appears in the opening 291, the display screen of the effect display device 115 is visually recognized through the inside of the window frame 448. The display area is divided into a first display area (not shown) and a second display area (not shown) visually recognized outside the display frame portion 429, and different effect images are displayed on the first display area and the second display area. Display. In particular, in this example, the first display area is divided into an area that can be viewed through the right window frame 448 and an area that can be viewed through the left window frame 448, and different effect images are displayed. For example, the speed (speed) is displayed in one first display area, and the engine speed is displayed in the other first display area.

  In addition, an area displacement control unit 444 (see FIG. 50) is provided, and the relative position between the first display area and the second display area is displayed on the display frame part 429 while the display frame part 429 is being raised and lowered. Displacement is made by following up and down. That is, by controlling the effect image that is visually recognized through the inside of the display frame part 429 to follow the movable position of the display frame part 429, the effect image is controlled not to protrude from the display frame part 429. .

  Thus, by displaying different effect images on the inner side and the outer side of the display frame portion 429, it is possible to make the bag appear as if there are two display means, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect. . In particular, since the first display area is displaced in accordance with the raising and lowering of the display frame part 429, a specific effect can always be visually recognized through the display frame part 429 even when the display frame part 429 is movable. The impression that the display device 115 is separate is not aroused. Further, since the display frame portion 429 can appear and disappear, the player can be surprised by the appearance.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 16, a transparent partition plate 298 that closes the opening 291 of the rear frame 292 is provided, whereby the stage 461 and the meter display device 297 are partitioned. . For this reason, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the stage 461 from flowing down to the meter display device 297 side, that is, the display frame portion 429 being an obstacle. In addition, a transparent cover 504 that protrudes forward from the flat partition plate 298 and covers the composite guiding device 293 and the rotary sorting device 294 is integrally formed at the lower right corner of the partition plate 298, thereby A game ball rolling on the stage 461 is prevented from entering an area where the composite guidance device 293 and the rotary sorting device 294 are arranged.

Next, the electrical configuration of such a pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.
[Electric configuration of pachinko machine]
FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The pachinko machine 1 is mainly configured to include a main board 780 and a peripheral board 781.
Here, the main substrate 780 is
・ Game ball detection.
・ Lottery processing related to various wins.
-Fluctuation display control for special symbols and normal symbols.
・ Control for paying out prize balls (payout control).
It is a part that performs various controls so that the game progresses according to a predetermined rule.

On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 781 includes:
・ Lighting control of production lamp.
・ Sound control.
-Display control of production images.
In other words, it is a part that adds various effects to the game progressed by the main board 780, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Main board]
The main board 780 includes a main control board 765 and a payout control board 775. Among them, the main control board 765 includes a main control MPU 765a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 765b as an input / output device (I / O device), the inspection connector 218, and the RAM clear. A switch 769 and the like are provided.

  Here, the main control MPU 765a includes a ROM as a read-only memory in which a control program and various commands relating to the progress of the game are stored, a RAM as a readable / writable memory in which stored data is updated each time, and those It has a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), various functions for preventing fraud, and the like. The main control MPU 765a includes the second start port sensor 317, the first start port sensor 318, the count sensor 319, the winning port sensor 330, the V winning sensor 331, the discharge sensor 313, and the like. Detection signals from various sensors are input via the main control I / O port 765b. That is, by executing a control program stored in the ROM based on such a detection signal, the ordinary accessory driving mechanism 334, the big prize opening opening / closing mechanism 335, and the swing piece of the sorting device 321 are operated. As appropriate, various actuators such as a sorting device driving mechanism 336 configured to have an actuator for swinging 363, the speed switching unit 409, the holding driving mechanism 338, and the attacker driving mechanism 339 are appropriately used. A drive signal is output, and various games played in the pachinko machine 1 proceed according to a predetermined rule. As will be described later, the main control MPU 765a of the main control board 765 includes display control of the special symbol display 332, the normal symbol display 333, the special reserved ball lamp 322, and the normal reserved ball lamp 323, Signals (effect command, payout command) indicating the progress of the game are also output to the peripheral board 781 and the payout control board 775.

  In this embodiment, the main control MPU 765a outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the external terminal board 371 via the main control I / O port 765b. As described above, the external terminal board 371 is a part connected to a hall computer (not shown), so that the hall computer can grasp and monitor the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1. .

  As will be described later, the main control MPU 765a transmits a command about a display mode of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 to the peripheral board 781 described later via the main control I / O port 765b. .

  The main control board 765 is supplied with power from a power supply board (not shown). The power supply board includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply that supplies power to the main control board 765 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. The main control MPU 765a can store various types of information in its built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off, as will be described in detail later, by the power supplied by the capacitor. The stored information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 769 of the main control board 765 is operated when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 775 is a part that outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 170 based on a payout command from the main control board 765. A payout control I / O port 775b as a device, an error LED display 777, an error release switch 778, a ball removal switch 779, and the like are provided.

  The payout control board 775 is connected to the ball payout device 170 via the payout relay board 108, and commands (drive signals) are exchanged with the ball payout apparatus 170 via the payout relay board 108. The ball payout device 170 includes a payout motor 172 that rotates to cut out game balls taken into the ball payout device 170 into various ball guide passages or various ball discharge passages by a ball cutout member (not shown), a ball cutout member A rotation angle switch 102 for detecting a rotation position (not shown), a counting switch 101 for counting the number of game balls actually paid out, and the like are provided.

  Here, the payout control MPU 775a includes a ROM as a read-only memory in which a control program and various commands for paying out a game ball (prize ball) to the player according to the progress of the game are stored. A RAM as a readable / writable memory in which data is updated each time, various functions for preventing fraud, and the like are provided. The payout control MPU 775a receives a payout command related to payout from the main control board 765 and an operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 769 via the payout control I / O port 775b. It has become. That is, the control program stored in the ROM is executed based on the payout command received in this way, so that a drive signal is output to the payout motor 172. As a result, according to the received payout command, Game balls will be paid out for the number of prize balls shown. In this embodiment, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 is used for the winning ball to be paid out to the player when the entrance of the game ball into the center accessory 91 is detected by the winning hole sensor 330. More than the number, the control for the payout of the game ball is performed so that more prize balls are paid out when the count sensor 319 detects that the game ball has entered the lower large winning opening 83. It has become a thing.

  In the same payout control MPU 775a, when the ball removal switch 779 is operated, the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are discharged (ball removal) based on this operation signal (detection signal). Therefore, a drive signal to the payout motor 172 is also output. Furthermore, when a rent request signal from the prepaid card unit 1a is input via the interface board 252 described above, a drive signal to the payout motor 172 is also output based on the rent request signal.

  The payout control MPU 775a transmits various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 765 via the payout control I / O port 775b, or fills up the switch 107. When the detection signal is input, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 172 is stopped based on this detection signal, or the number of game balls actually paid out is calculated and is used as the payout control I / Or output to the external terminal board 371 via the O port 775b. Thereby, the hall computer can grasp the total number of game balls paid out from the pachinko machine 1.

  When the prepaid card unit 1 a is connected to the interface board 252, a game ball launch permission signal from the prepaid card unit 1 a is input to the above-described launch control board 372 via the interface board 252 and the payout control board 775. It is like that. When this launch permission signal is input, the launch control board 372 becomes ready to launch a game ball by the launch device 194 described above. As a result, when the operation handle 32 is operated, a detection signal from a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the operation handle 32 is input to the launch control board 372, so that the game is played by the launch device 194. A ball is fired. That is, when the operation handle 32 is operated, the detection signal from the full switch 107 is input to the payout control MPU 775a, and the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 172 is stopped. In addition, a game ball is launched by the launching device 194. In this way, the game ball launched from the launching device 194 is guided along the guide rail 78 to the launch opening 78a formed above the game area 37, and is driven toward the game area 37 from the launch opening. .

  Power is supplied to the payout control board 775 from a power supply board (not shown) in the same manner as the main control board 765. The power supply board includes a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 775 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With the power supplied from this capacitor, the payout control MPU 775a can store various payout information related to payout in its built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 769 of the main control board 765 is operated when the power is turned on.

[About peripheral boards]
As shown in FIG. 41, the peripheral board 781 includes a sub-integrated board 763 and a liquid crystal control board 758.
The sub-integrated board 763 includes a sub-integrated MPU 763a as a microprocessor, a sub-integrated ROM 763b that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC 763c that performs high-quality sound, and music that the sound source IC 763c refers to. And a sound ROM 763d in which sound information such as sound effects is stored. That is, when the production command is received from the main control board 765, the sub-integrated MPU 763a executes the control program based on the command, thereby sending a lighting signal to the decoration lamp 394 which is a lamp on the outer frame side. Or a lighting signal is output to the prize ball lamp 396. In addition, a lighting signal is output to the effect lamp 395 which is a decoration lamp of the game board 5 through the lamp driving board 46, a gradation lighting signal is output to the gradation lamp 397, the meter motor 489 and the ornament. A drive signal is output to the motor 303, respectively.

  Further, the effect command from the main control board 765 received by the sub integrated MPU 763a is output to the sound source IC 763c and the liquid crystal control board 758. As a result, the sound source IC 763c reads sound information from the sound ROM 763d based on the effect command output from the sub-integrated MPU 763a, so that the music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects are output from the speakers 18 and 57 as sound outputs. Will come to be.

  On the other hand, the liquid crystal control board 758 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 758a as a microprocessor, a liquid crystal control ROM 758b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 758c that controls display of the effect display device 115. An image ROM 758d for storing various images to be displayed on the effect display device 115.

  When the liquid crystal control MPU 758a receives the effect command described above from the sub-integrated board 763, the liquid crystal control MPU 758a controls the VDP 758c based on the effect command. The VDP 758c reads out an image from the image ROM 758d and controls display of the effect display device 115. If the liquid crystal control MPU 758a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the sub-integrated board 763.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a functional block diagram schematically showing functional configurations of the main board and the peripheral board.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the main board 780 includes a normal symbol per-determining random number extracting means 601, a normal symbol success / failure judging means 602, a first holding means 603, a first hold releasing means 604, and a normal symbol display. Control means 605, normal symbol hold display control means 606, normal winning game execution means 607, and advantageous game execution means 608 are provided. In addition, random number extraction means 611 for determining a special symbol per unit, determining unit 612 for determining whether to win a special symbol, second holding unit 613, second holding release unit 614, special symbol display control unit 615, and special symbol holding display control Means 616, jackpot game execution means 617, and jackpot game execution means 618 are provided. Further, a command transmission unit 620, a discharge determination unit 621, a winning determination unit 622, and a prize ball payout unit 623 are provided.

  Here, the normal symbol per-determination random number extracting means 601 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the normal symbol start port 96 based on an output signal from the first start port sensor 318. At the same time (first start determination means), a random number is extracted when it is determined that the ball has entered. The extracted random numbers are held by the first holding means 603 up to a first predetermined number (for example, four), whereby the normal symbol variation display control is put on hold. On the other hand, such a hold state is released by the first hold release unit 604 when a predetermined release condition (for example, that the previous variable display control for the normal symbol has been completed) is satisfied. Then, the normal symbol success / failure determination means (first lottery means) 602 determines whether or not the normal symbol is won based on the released random number (lottery processing).

  However, in this embodiment, the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602 determines the normal symbol display (game information display device) according to the result of the determination as to whether or not the normal winning (first winning) is won. 333 and the effect display device (effect image display device) 115 also function as a portion (first display mode determining means) that determines the display mode of information displayed in the main board 780. The display mode determined internally in this way is first variably displayed on the normal symbol display 333 for a predetermined variation time by the normal symbol display control means (first display control means) 605. The number of holds by the first holding means 603 is displayed on the normal holding ball lamp 323 (LED 85) by the normal symbol hold display control means 606. Also, if the lottery result by the normal symbol winning / determining means 602 is a normal winning, the normal winning game executing means (drive control means) 607 controls the driving of the normal accessory driving mechanism 334 to the special symbol starting port 82. The second movable piece (movable member) 81 is operated so that a game ball can enter.

  Further, the advantageous game executing means 608 variably sets the probability of entering the game ball into the special symbol starting port 82 to a higher probability when a predetermined condition (for example, winning a big hit) is satisfied. It is a part to do. More specifically, whether or not the player is in the advantageous gaming state to be described later is determined based on the result of the determination by the special symbol adequacy determination unit 612. It outputs to the game execution means 607. As a result, the normal hit game execution means 607 operates the so-called opening extension function, and the operation time of the long hit time described later (for example, “5700 ms”) is always used as the operation time of the second movable piece 81. Adopted.

  On the other hand, the random number extraction means 611 for determining the special symbol hit determines whether or not a game ball has entered the special symbol starting port 82 based on the output signal from the second starting port sensor 317. At the same time (second start determination means), a random number is extracted when it is determined that the ball has been entered. The extracted random numbers are held by the second holding means 613 up to a second predetermined number (for example, two), and the special symbol variation display control is put on hold. On the other hand, such a hold state is released by the second hold release unit 614 when a predetermined release condition (for example, that the previous variable display control for the special symbol has been completed) is satisfied. Then, the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 (second lottery means) determines whether or not a special winning (in this case, a big win or a small winning) has been won based on the released random number (lottery process). It will be.

  However, in this embodiment, the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 determines the special symbol display (game information display device) according to the result of determination as to whether or not the special winning (second winning) is won. It also functions as a portion (second display mode determining means) that determines the display mode of information displayed on the main board 780. The display mode thus determined internally is first variably displayed on the special symbol display 332 for a predetermined variation time by the special symbol display control means (second display control means) 615 (second game). information). The number of holds by the second holding means 613 is displayed on the special holding ball lamp 322 (LED 87) by the special symbol hold display control means 616. In addition, when the lottery result by the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 is a small win, the small hit game execution means 618 controls the driving of the special winning opening / closing mechanism 335 so that the first winning opening 141 is opened. By operating the movable piece 142, it is possible to enter a game ball into an area in the center accessory 91 (small hit game). When the lottery result by the special symbol success / failure determination means 612 is a big win, the big hit game execution means 617 controls the attacker drive mechanism 339 to enter the game ball into the lower big winning opening 83 through the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 99. Is possible (a jackpot game). In the present embodiment, the winning probability for the jackpot is set with a probability close to 100%, such as 1000/1005, and the winning probability for the jackpot is set to 1/360. In this way, the winning probability for the jackpot is much smaller than the winning probability for the jackpot.

  In addition, the command transmission unit 620 includes a first command indicating the display mode (winning information, variation time information, etc.) determined by the first display mode determination unit (ordinary symbol success / failure determination unit 602), and the first The second command indicating the display mode (such as winning information) determined by the second display mode determining unit (special symbol success / failure determining unit 612) is transmitted to the peripheral board 781.

  The discharge determination means 621 detects that the game ball has flowed out of the specific area 344 by the V winning sensor 331 or has detected that the game ball has flowed out of the normal area 345 by the discharge sensor 313. On the basis of the above, it is detected that the game ball is discharged from the center accessory 91.

  Also, the winning determination means 622 determines which of the big winning hole 141 and the lower large winning hole 83 the gaming ball has won by detecting the gaming ball by the winning hole sensor 330 and detecting the gaming ball by the count sensor 319. It is the part to judge. Then, according to the determination result by the winning determination means 622, the winning ball paying means 623 controls the ball paying operation of the ball paying device 170, and the game is played according to the winning at the big winning opening 141 or the lower large winning opening 83. Pay out the ball. When winning a prize at the lower winning prize opening 83, more prize balls are paid out than when winning at the winning prize opening 141. In this embodiment, the prize ball payout means 623 is provided as the payout control board 775, and a predetermined number of game balls are also paid out even when winning a special symbol start port 82 (second start port sensor 317).

On the other hand, the peripheral board 781 includes command receiving means 630, normal symbol image display control means 631, and special symbol image display control means 632.
Here, the command reception means (information acquisition means) 630 is a part that receives the first command, the second command, and the like from the command transmission means 620 of the main board 780.

  Also, the normal symbol image display control means (first image control means, third image control means) 631 is a command (first command) related to the normal hit among the commands received by the command receiving means 630. ) Based on the effect display device 115 is a part for variably displaying the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115. More specifically, the normal symbol image display control means 631 responds to the lottery result for the normal hit determined in the main board 780 based on the first command (first effect information). The variable display output (display control by the third image control means) is performed in such a manner that the display mode appears as the main effect image on the effect display device 115. At the same time, based on the first command (first appropriate information), a variable display output is performed in such a manner that the display mode appears as a modest effect image rather than the main effect image (first image control). Display control by means).

  That is, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 to 83, in this embodiment, the effect display device 115 is provided so as to occupy most of the entire area, and the special game is performed. A lottery information display area (expectation degree expression area) 1151 for expressing the degree of expectation for the event and a portion that occupies only a part of the upper part of the entire area and are sequentially executed by the main control board 765. A plurality of internal processes (for example, a special symbol lottery process, a normal symbol lottery process, a holding function, etc.) related to the progress of the game can be recognized as functioning properly, respectively. Main control function diagnosis area) 1152. In this embodiment, in particular, the game information display area 1152 includes a hold corresponding display area 1153 corresponding to the display of the hold ball lamp, and a normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 in which a display mode corresponding to the lottery result for the normal hit appears. And a special symbol corresponding display area 1155 in which a display mode corresponding to the lottery result for the special win appears, and the adequacy of the hold function of the main control board 765 can be recognized more clearly. I am doing so. In this regard, the normal symbol image display control means 631 predetermines in the lottery information display area 1151 a display mode corresponding to the lottery result for the normal hit (first hit) determined in the main board 780. The display mode is made to appear as a main effect image on the effect display device 115 by outputting the change display for the change time. Accordingly, the degree of expectation that the special game will be performed is expressed in the same lottery information display area 1151. At the same time, the display mode corresponding to the lottery result for the normal hit determined in the main board 780 is output to the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 in a variable display manner for a predetermined change time. It appears as a modest effect image on the effect display device 115 (for example, an effect image displayed in a sub-region described later). Thus, the main control board 765 performs the game ball in accordance with the game ball entering the normal symbol start port 96 among the plurality of internal processes relating to the progress of the game executed sequentially by the main control board 765. It becomes possible to recognize that various internal processes are functioning properly.

  Further, the special symbol image display control means (second image control means, fourth image control means) 632 includes a command (second command) related to the special winning among commands received by the command receiving means 630. ) Based on the effect display device 115 is a part for variably displaying the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115. More specifically, the special symbol image display control means 632 responds to the lottery result for the special win determined in the main board 780 based on the second command (second effect information). The variable display output (display control by the fourth image control means) is performed in such a manner that the display mode appears as a main effect image on the effect display device 115. In addition, based on the second command (second appropriate information), a variable display output is performed in such a manner that the display mode appears as a modest effect image rather than the main effect image (second image control). Display control by means). Similarly, the special symbol image display control means 632 displays the display mode indicated by the second command in the lottery information display area 1151 so that the display mode is the main effect on the effect display device 115. It appears as an image. Accordingly, the degree of expectation that the special game will be performed is expressed in the same lottery information display area 1151. At the same time, the display mode indicated by the second command is variably displayed and output in the special symbol corresponding display area 1155 for a predetermined fluctuation time, so that the display mode is a modest effect image on the effect display device 115 To appear. Thus, the main control board 765 performs the game ball in accordance with the entry of the game ball into the special symbol starting port 82 among the plurality of internal processes relating to the progress of the game executed sequentially by the main control board 765. It becomes possible to recognize that various internal processes are functioning properly. As will be described later, this special symbol image display control means 632 displays such a special display effect in the lottery information display area 1151 when a game ball is won in the special winning opening 141. The display control for winning (special symbol) is also extended.

  However, in this embodiment, the normal symbol image display control means 631 performs image display according to the special lottery result when performing the variable display output for the display mode according to the lottery result for the normal hit. It is determined whether output (display control by the second and fourth image control means) is being performed. When it is determined that the image display output is performed by the special symbol image display control unit 632, the normal symbol image display control unit 631 displays a display output (third image) on the lottery information display area 1151. Display control by the control means) is stopped. However, also at this time, the display output to the game information display area 1152 by the normal symbol image display control means 631 (display control by the first image control means) is maintained, thereby the main control board. It is possible to recognize that the control function by 765 is appropriate.

  On the other hand, the first hold release unit 604 releases the hold state even when the display control by the third image control unit is thus stopped. In addition, the normal symbol success / failure determination means 602 also displays the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 in accordance with the result of the determination as to whether or not the normal winning is made regardless of the suspension of the display control. Is determined in the main substrate 780. Then, the command transmission means 620 transmits the first command to the peripheral board 781 in response to such determination. Thereby, in the lottery information display area 1151, the image effect corresponding to the special winning lottery result (display control by the fourth image control means) is changed to the image effect corresponding to the normal winning lottery result (third Display in stages with respect to the display control by the image control means, thereby expressing that the degree of expectation that the special game will be performed is higher.

  In this embodiment, the normal symbol image display control means 631 also performs control to resume the suspended change display output (display control by the third image control means). That is, the normal symbol image display control means 631 counts the sub-timer (counting the variation time of the display mode for the normal symbol at the end of the display output to the lottery information display area 1151 for the series of display modes related to the special winning. It is determined whether or not the timer means for counting the scheduled time for which the display control according to the lottery result for the normal winning is performed. When the sub-timer is in operation, the main variable display output for the normal symbol is resumed after the display output for the series of display modes relating to the special hit is completed. However, at this time, the main variation display of the normal symbol in the lottery information display area 1151 (main region) is not executed by the original image output, but the symbol is rapidly scrolled until the above-mentioned sub timer expires. This is done by high-speed fluctuation output. As a result, when the sub-timer has timed out, the lottery is selected as the stop display mode that appears when the variable display is stopped, out of the display modes corresponding to the lottery result for the normal hit determined initially in the main board 780. It is displayed in the information display area 1151.

[Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 765 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interruption processing, prize ball command and self-check command transmission processing, and ACK signal input determination processing. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning ball command and self-check command transmission process, and FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of an ACK signal input determination process. The prize ball command and self-check command transmission process and the ACK signal input determination process are performed as one process of the prize ball control process in step S80 in the main control timer interruption process described later.

<1. Various random numbers>
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for determining a normal symbol used in a lottery process for winning a hit (ordinary winning) that triggers the operation of the second movable piece 81, and determining whether or not the normal symbol is hit A normal pattern hitting determination initial value determining random number used to determine the initial value of the normal random number, a normal symbol changing pattern determining random number used to determine the variable display pattern to be displayed on the normal symbol display 333, and a normal symbol A random number for determining a normal symbol to be used for a lottery process for a display mode when the variable display of symbols is stopped is prepared. In addition, a special symbol hit determination random number used for the lottery processing for the small win and the big win and a special symbol hit determination initial value determination used for determining the initial value of the special symbol hit determination random number And random numbers for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol used for determining a variation display pattern to be displayed on the special symbol display 332 are prepared.

<2. Main control side power-on processing>
When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 765a of the main control board 765 performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. When the main control side power-on process is started, an interrupt mode is set (step S10). This interrupt mode sets the priority order of interrupts of the main control MPU 765a. In the present embodiment, a main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the main control timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed. Subsequent to step S10, input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) is performed (step S12). In this I / O input / output setting, input / output setting of the I / O port of the main control MPU 765a is performed. Following step S12, the watchdog timer built in the main control MPU 765a is set to be valid (step S14). This watchdog timer is for monitoring the operation (system) of the main control MPU 765a, and when it is not cleared for a certain period of time, the main control MPU 765a is reset (whether the system of the main control MPU 765a is out of control). Diagnose regularly).

  Following step S14, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S16). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases. A power failure signal is input when the voltage is equal to or lower than the power failure notice voltage from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage. Therefore, in the wait timer process 1, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Subsequent to step S16, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 769 is operated (step S18). This determination is performed based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 769 of the main control board 765 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control board 765. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 769 is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 769 is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 769 is operated in step S18, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S20). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 769 is not operated in step S18, the RAM clear is cleared. A value 0 is set in the notification flag RCL-FLG (step S22). This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 765a, and game information related to games such as advantageous games and unpaid prize balls. Is a flag indicating whether or not to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S20 and step S22 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 765a.

  Following step S20 or step S22, wait timer processing 2 is performed (step S24). In this wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system that performs display control of the effect display device 115 by the liquid crystal control board 758 is started (booted). For example, various control programs compressed from the liquid crystal control ROM 758b are read out and expanded and stored in a RAM built in the liquid crystal control MPU 758a. In the present embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer). Subsequent to step S24, a setting for permitting access to the main internal RAM is performed (step S26). With this setting, the main built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, game information can be written (stored) or read. Subsequent to step S26, the stack pointer is set (step S28). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S28, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Following step S28, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S30). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when erasing game information and a value 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S30, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S32). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main internal RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum. Subsequent to step S32, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off) described later (step S34). . If they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S36). The backup flag BK-FLG indicates whether or not backup information such as game information, a checksum value, and a backup flag BK-FLG value is stored and held in the main built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. It is a flag, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S36, that is, when the main control side power-off process has been completed normally, the work area of the main internal RAM is set as the time of power recovery (step S38). In this setting, in addition to setting the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0, power recovery information is read from a ROM built in the main control MPU 765a (hereinafter referred to as “main built-in ROM”). Information is set in the work area of the main internal RAM. Here, “at power recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is turned on, and also a state in which power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure. Subsequent to step S38, power-on command creation processing is performed (step S40). In the power-on command creation process, game information is read from the backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main internal RAM. Note that various commands will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S30, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S34, or step S36. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally, the entire area of the main internal RAM is cleared (step S42). As a setting, the work area of the main internal RAM is set (step S44). In this setting, the initial information is read from the main internal ROM and the initial information is set in the work area of the main internal RAM. Subsequent to step S44, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing is performed (step S46). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a RAM clear notification command for notifying the sub-integrated board 763 that the main built-in RAM has been cleared and initial setting has been performed, and various inspections of the sub-integrated board 763 are performed. And a test command for generating the test command, and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main internal RAM. When the sub-integrated board 763 receives the RAM clear notification command, the RAM clear notification command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 758. On the other hand, when the test command is received, the sound source IC 763c, the liquid crystal control board 758, and the lamp driving board 46 are changed. Send a test command for inspection.

  Subsequent to step S40 or step S46, interrupt initialization is performed (step S48). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms. Subsequent to step S48, interrupt permission is set. (Step S50). With this setting, the main control timer interruption process is repeated every interruption cycle set in step S48, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S50, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S52). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register WCL in order. Following step S52, it is determined whether a power failure signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure signal is input as a power failure warning when the voltage is equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure signal. When no power failure signal is input in step S54, non-winning random number update processing is performed (step S56).

  In this non-winning random number update process, the above-described normal symbol hitting determination initial value determining random number, fluctuation pattern determining random number, and the like are updated. For example, the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number increases the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the normal symbol hit determination random number by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt processing described later is performed. (Count up). This counter counts up from an initial value determining random number for hit determination of a normal symbol to an upper limit value when the random value for determining the initial value for determining the hit of a normal symbol is set (updated) by non-winning random number update processing, Subsequently, it counts up from the lower limit value to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol. Then, the random value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is updated again by the non-winning random number update process. As described above, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. It should be noted that the above-described special symbol hit determination initial value determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update processing. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the special symbol is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Following step S56, the process returns to step S52 again to set the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. In step S54, it is determined whether or not there is a power failure signal. The non-winning random number update process is performed, and Steps S52 to S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S52 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure signal is input in step S54, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected. Subsequent to step S58, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S60). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above. Subsequent to step S60, the value 1 is set to the backup flag BK-FLG. (Step S62) This completes the storage of the backup information. Subsequent to step S62, prohibition of access to the main internal RAM is set (step S64). With this setting, access to the main built-in RAM is prohibited, and writing and reading cannot be performed, and backup information stored in the main built-in RAM is protected. Subsequent to step S64, the watchdog timer is cleared (step S66). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Following step S66, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the main control MPU 765a is reset, and the main control MPU 765a performs the main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing of step S58 to step S66 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 765a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on processing is performed by the subsequent power recovery.
In step S34, it is checked whether the backup information stored in the main built-in RAM is normal, and in step S36, it is checked whether the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. is doing. In this way, by checking the backup information stored in the main built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether the backup information is stored by fraud.

<3. Main control timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 765a of the main control board 765 sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 45 (step S70). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the main process on the main control side is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, the value of the general register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main process on the main control side from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S70, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S72). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S52 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port 765b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main built-in RAM. For example, a detection signal from a first start port sensor 318 that detects a game ball that has entered the normal symbol start port 96, and a detection from a second start port sensor 317 that detects a game ball that has entered the special symbol start port 82. A signal, a detection signal from the winning port sensor 330 that detects a game ball that has entered the big winning port 141, a detection signal from the count sensor 319 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower big winning port 83, and a specific area 344 A detection signal from the V winning sensor 331 that detects a game ball that has flowed out from the game, a detection signal from the discharge sensor 313 that detects a game ball that has flowed out from the normal area 345, and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later. The ACK signal from the payout control board 775 that informs that the payout control board 775 has received normally is read and stored in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S74, a timer subtraction process is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 332 is turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, determined in the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time during which the special symbol display 332 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern, an ACK signal is transmitted that indicates that the payout control board 775 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 765 (main control MPU 765a). Time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the signal is input is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Is subtracted every 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, so that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbol or the fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, 100 ms is set as the ACK signal input determination time, and every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0 so that the ACK signal input is determined. Judgment time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, a winning random number update process is performed (step S78). In this winning random number update process, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol determination random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number etc. updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) are also updated. To do. Randomness for initial value determination for determining a normal symbol hit is updated in the main control-side main process and the main control-side timer interrupt process, thereby increasing the randomness. On the other hand, since the normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol determination random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (ordinary winning determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. For example, the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number counts up the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the normal symbol hit determination random number every time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. This counter counts up from a random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol to an upper limit value, and then counts up from a lower limit value to an initial value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the normal symbol hit determination random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random numbers are updated by this winning random number update processing. The hit determination random number and the hit determination initial value determination random number described above are also updated by the winning random number update process. The special symbol hit determination random number and the like are the same as the above-described method of updating the normal symbol hit determination random number, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Subsequent to step S78, prize ball control processing is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-described input state storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or the board of the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775. Or create a self-check command to check the connection status. Then, the created prize ball command or self-check command is transmitted to the payout control board 775. For example, when one game ball enters the lower large winning opening 83, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 775, or the prize ball command is paid out. When the ACK signal notifying that the board 775 has been normally received is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 65 and the payout control board 775 is created and the payout control board 775 is created. Or send to. Detailed descriptions thereof will be described later.

  Following step S80, a prize ball check process is performed (step S82). In this prize ball check process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when a game ball enters the lower side big winning opening 83 when it is not in the big hit game state, a prize ball abnormality notification command is created as an abnormal state and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. (The abnormal state is confirmed based on the input information read out from the input information storage area). Following step S82, command reception processing is performed (step S84). The payout control board 775 transmits a state command such as a state in which the ball payout device 170 does not pay out the game ball due to the ball staking, as will be described in detail later. In the command reception process of step S84, when this status command is normally received, information that informs the payout control board 775 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main internal RAM. Although the detailed description thereof will be described later, the normally received status command is shaped and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S84, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is performed (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and whether or not the detection signal from the second start port sensor 317 is input to the input terminal based on this input information. Determine whether. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the values of various counters that update the above-described special symbol hit determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc. are extracted and used as starting information. The information is stored in the start information storage area of the built-in RAM 316. In this start information storage area, start information storage blocks 0 to 1 (two start information storage blocks) are provided, and start information is stored in time series in each start information storage block. Note that each start information corresponds to a special symbol hold, and in this embodiment, the maximum number of special symbols held is “2”. Then, the output of the lighting signal is set so that the number of the start information storage blocks is the holding ball and the special holding ball lamp 322 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Then, based on the starting information read from the starting information storage block 0, the value of the special symbol hit determination random number is taken out, and it is determined whether or not it matches the special hit determination value stored in advance in the main built-in ROM ( The game state determined by these determination results is determined. Based on the above-described determined game state, a special symbol variation pattern or the like is determined based on the above-described special symbol variation pattern determination random number, and a game effect command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Also, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when the big hit gaming state is set, the output of the driving signal to the attacker driving mechanism 339 is set so as to open and close the lower side large winning opening 83, and the output described above as the output information Store in the information storage area. Further, when the small winning game state is entered, the output of the drive signal to the big winning opening / closing mechanism 335 is set so as to open / close the big winning opening 141, and is stored as output information in the above-described output information storage area. Details of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S86, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is performed (step S88). Here, in the normal electric accessory control process, the operation control of the second movable piece 81 is performed. In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and whether or not a detection signal from the first start port sensor 318 is input to the input terminal based on the input information. Determine whether. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the values of various counters for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number described above are extracted and used as starting information. Store in the startup information storage area of the built-in RAM. In this start information storage area, start information storage blocks 0 to 3 (four start information storage blocks) are provided, and start information is stored in time series in each start information storage block. Note that each start information corresponds to a normal symbol hold, and in this embodiment, the maximum number of normal symbol holds is “4”. Then, the number of start information storage blocks is set as a holding ball, the output of the lighting signal is set so that the normal holding ball lamp 323 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Then, based on the start information read from the start information storage block 0, the normal symbol hit determination random number value is taken out to determine whether or not it matches the normal hit determination value stored in advance in the main built-in ROM ( The game state determined by these determination results is determined. Based on the above-described determined game state, the normal symbol variation pattern or the like is determined based on the above-described normal symbol variation pattern determination random number, and a game effect command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when the normal hit game state is entered, the drive signal to the normal accessory drive mechanism 334 is switched so that the special symbol start port 82 is switched to a mode in which a ball can be entered (allowed ball mode) Is output and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The details of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 765b, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, an ACK signal is output to the payout control board 775 when the state command from the payout control board 775 is normally received from the output terminal based on the output information, or the lower side big prize opening 83 when it is in the big hit gaming state. A drive signal is output to the attacker drive mechanism 339 that performs the opening / closing operation of the jackpot, or a jackpot signal indicating that the jackpot game state is in effect is output to the external terminal board 371.

  Subsequent to step S90, sub-integrated board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In the sub-integrated board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763. As described above, the transmission information includes a game effect command, a RAM clear notification command, a test command, a prize ball abnormality notification command, a status command, and the like. In addition to this transmission information, connection is established when there is a malfunction in the connection state based on the value of the self-check flag set when the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775 is confirmed. A failure command is created and transmitted to the sub-integrated board 63.

  Subsequent to step S92, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). At this time, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S72. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared. Subsequent to step S94, the register is switched (returned) (step S96). This restoration is performed by reading the contents saved on the stack in step S70 and writing them to the register. Subsequent to step S96, interrupt permission is set (step S98), and this routine is terminated.

<4. Prize ball command and self-check command transmission processing>
Next, prize ball command and self-check command transmission processing will be described. In this prize ball command and self-check command transmission process, a prize ball command for instructing the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775. The command is transmitted to the payout control board 775.

  When the prize ball command and self-check command transmission process is started, the main control MPU 765a of the main control board 765 determines whether or not the self-check flag SCHK-FLG is a value 1 as shown in FIG. Step S100). This self-check flag SCHK-FLG is set when a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775 is generated and transmitted in an ACK signal input determination process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when a self-check command is transmitted and a value of 0 when a self-check command is not transmitted. The self-check flag SCHK-FLG is set to an initial value of 0, that is, a state in which no self-check command is transmitted.

  When the self-check flag SCHK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S100, that is, when no self-check command is transmitted, a problem occurs in the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775. If not, a prize ball command transmission process is performed (step S102). In this prize ball command transmission process, for example, when one game ball enters the lower large winning opening 83, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 775. When the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 775, the prize ball command is erased. That is, the created prize ball command can be transmitted only once from the main control board 765 (main control MPU 765a) to the payout control board 775, and is discarded after transmission.

  On the other hand, when the self-check flag SCHK-FLG is 1 in step 100, that is, when a self-check command is transmitted, it is assumed that there is a problem in the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775. The self-check flag SCHK-FLG is set to 0 (step S104), self-check command transmission processing (step S106) is performed, and this routine is terminated. In this self-check command transmission process, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775 is created and transmitted to the payout control board 775. When the prize ball command transmission process in step S102 and the self-check command transmission process in step S106 are started, the above-described time measurement of the ACK signal input determination time (100 ms in this embodiment) is started.

  By setting the value of the self-check flag SCHK-FLG to the value 0 in step S104 (that is, by setting the value of the self-check flag SCHK-FLGK from the value 1 to the value 0), the self-check command transmitted in step S106 However, when an ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 775 has normally received the self-check command is input in an ACK signal input determination process described later, a prize ball command transmission process is performed in step S102. At this time, in the prize ball command transmission process, if there is a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball, a prize ball command of that number is created and transmitted to the payout control board 775. On the other hand, if the self-check command transmitted in step S106 does not receive an ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 775 has normally received the self-check command in the ACK signal input determination process described later, the self-check command is issued again in step S106. The self-check command is repeatedly transmitted to the payout control board 775 unless the ACK signal is input.

  Thus, the main control board 765 (main control MPU 765a) transmits a prize ball command to the payout control board 775 and transmits a check command to the payout control board 775 when an ACK signal is not input from the payout control board 775. Thereby, for example, it is possible to easily confirm a connection failure such as a cable connector that electrically connects between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775 is disconnected or the cable is disconnected. Can do.

  Further, for example, an illegal board (so-called hanging board) is provided separately from the payout control board 775 so that the ACK signal is not input to the main control board 765, and the player starts the illegal board program by remote control operation. Even if the act is performed, the main control board 765 (main control MPU 765a) transmits a check command to the payout control board 775 instead of retransmitting the prize ball command when the ACK signal is not input. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a player from illegally acquiring a game ball by an illegal act using an illegal board, and to safely check a connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775. it can. A detailed description of the above-described prize ball command and self-check command will be given later.

<5. ACK signal input determination processing>
Next, the ACK signal input determination process will be described. In this ACK signal input determination process, it is determined whether or not the payout control board 775 has normally received a prize ball command or a self-check command.

  When the ACK signal input determination process is started, the main control MPU 765a of the main control board 765 determines whether or not the ACK signal input determination time has elapsed as shown in FIG. 47 (step S110). This determination is made based on the ACK signal input determination time subtracted in the timer subtraction process in step S76 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Specifically, the ACK signal input determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main internal RAM. In step S110, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ACK signal input determination time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S110 that the ACK signal input determination time has not elapsed, it is determined whether an ACK signal is input (step S112). This determination is made based on the ACK signal from the payout control board 775 in the switch input process in step S74 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Specifically, the ACK signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main built-in RAM. In step S112, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not an ACK signal is input.

  When an ACK signal is input in step S112, the self-check flag SCHK-FLG is set to 0 (step S114), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when no ACK signal is input in step S112, this routine is terminated as it is. The self-check flag SCHK-FLG is set to a value of 1 when transmitting a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775 and to a value of 0 when not transmitting the self-check command. ing. When the ACK signal is input, the self-check flag SCHK-FLG is set to 0 in step S114, that is, the self-check command is not transmitted. The value of the check flag SCHK-FLG is prevented from changing.

  On the other hand, when the ACK signal input determination time has elapsed in step S110, the self-check flag SCHK-FLGK is set to a value of 1, that is, a state in which a self-check command is transmitted (step S116), and this routine ends. By setting the self-check flag SCHK-FLGK to 1 in step S116, the self-check command transmission process is performed in step S106 in the prize ball command and self-check command transmission process shown in FIG. To the payout control board 775.

<6. Normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing>
Next, the details of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (first game process) will be described. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the first game process, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the first start detection process, and FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the first lottery / variation start process. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the first lottery variation display pattern setting process, FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the first variation process, and FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the first winning combination actuating process. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table.

  The normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process in step S88 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 45 will be described as a “first game process” below. As shown in FIG. 48, the main control MPU 765a performs, as “first game processing”, first start detection processing (step S8800), first lottery / variation start processing (step S8802), and first lottery variation display pattern setting processing. (Step S8804), the first changing process (Step S8806), and the first winning combination actuating process (Step S8808) are sequentially performed. Details of each process will be described below.

  First, as shown in FIG. 49, when the first start detection process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the first start detection flag is ON (step S8810). The first start detection flag is set to ON by the switch input process (step S74) when the first start port sensor 318 detects that a game ball has entered the normal symbol start port 96. If the first start detection flag is ON (YES in step S8810), it is further determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the usual figure by the first holding means 603 is smaller than 4 (step S8812). If the usual figure reserved ball count is smaller than 4 (YES in step S8812), a first start storage storing process is executed in which the random number extracted by the random number extraction means for normal symbol determination 601 is held in the first hold means 603 ( Step S8814). Specifically, in the first start storage storing process, a normal symbol hit determination random number, a variation pattern determination random number, and the like are stored as start information in the start information storage area for the main map hold in the main internal RAM. Note that after the first start storage storage process (step S8814), the first start detection process is terminated. Further, the first start detection process is also ended when the first start detection flag is OFF (NO in step S8810) or when the general-purpose reserved ball count is 4 or more (NO in step S8812).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50, when the first lottery / variation start process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the first job flag is “0” (step S8820). The first job flag is a flag for instructing a processing stage relating to a normal symbol. Here, when the symbol variation of the normal symbol is not performed (for example, the state where the demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device 115), the first job flag is set to “0”. If the first job flag is not “0” (NO in step S8820), the other process related to the normal symbol (for example, during the fluctuation of the normal symbol) is being executed, so the first lottery / variation start process Exit.

  If the first job flag is “0” (YES in step S8820), it is further determined whether or not the first hold means 603 has a first start memory (step S8822). If there is a first start memory (YES in step S8822), a first start memory transfer process is executed (step S8824). Specifically, in the first start memory transition process, the start information stored in the general information hold start information storage block 0 is read out and stored in a predetermined processing area. Thereafter, the start information in the start information storage block 1 is in the start information storage block 0, the start information in the start information storage block 2 is in the start information storage block 1, and the start information in the start information storage block 3 is in the start information storage block 2. The start information in the start information storage block 4 is shifted to the start information storage block 3, respectively. If the first start memory is 0 in step S8822 (NO in step S8822), the first lottery / variation start process is terminated.

  After performing the first start memory transition process in step S8824, it is determined whether or not the hit determination random number of the start information stored in the predetermined processing area is the first hit value (step S8826). At this time, if it is the first winning value (YES in step S8826), the first lottery first winning flag is turned ON (step S8828). The first lottery first winning flag is a flag that is set when winning per long. If it is not the first winning value (NO in step S8826), it is determined whether or not the hit determination random number of the start information stored in the predetermined processing area is the second winning value (step S8830). At this time, if it is the second winning value (YES in step S8830), the first lottery second winning flag is turned ON (step S8832). The first lottery second winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in a short win. If neither the first winning value nor the second winning value is obtained (NO in step S8830), neither the first lottery first winning flag nor the first lottery second winning flag is turned ON (it remains OFF). ). Thereafter, “1” is set to the first job flag described above (step S8834), and the first lottery / variation start process is terminated.

That is, in this embodiment,
-Operating time information indicating the minimum time (for example, "108 ms") as the operating time of the second movable piece 81 necessary for the game ball to enter the special symbol start port 82 is associated with Have a short hit.
The operation time information indicating a sufficiently long time (for example, “5700 ms”) as the operation time of the second movable piece 81 necessary for the game ball to enter the special symbol start opening 82 is associated. Per long.
These two types of hits (short hits and long hits) are included as hits that trigger the operation of the second movable piece 81.

  In the present embodiment, only 151 types of normal design hit determination random numbers are prepared. Of these random numbers for winning determination, the winning determination values coincide with the winning determination values (that is, the first winning value and the second winning value) indicating that 84 types of random values have been won. Is consistent with the winning judgment value indicating that the game is lost. In addition, among the winning determination values indicating that the winning is made in these hits, the two types of random number values coincide with the winning determination values (that is, the first winning value) indicating that the winning is per length, The random number value coincides with a winning determination value (that is, a second winning value) indicating that the short winning value is won. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning per short is set much higher than the probability of winning per long.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51, when the first lottery variation display pattern setting process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the first job flag is “1” (step S8840). If the first job flag is not “1” (NO in step S8840), the first lottery variation display pattern setting process is terminated.

  If the first job flag is “1” (YES in step S8840), it is further determined whether or not the first lottery first winning flag is ON (step S8842). At this time, if the first lottery first winning flag is ON (YES in step S8842), the first lottery first winning hour variation display pattern setting process is executed (step S8844). The first lottery first per hour variation display pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation display pattern corresponding to the lottery result per long. Specifically, from a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 54), which will be described later, a variation pattern (variation PT) 8, 10, 12, 14, 15 corresponding to the length based on a random number for determining a variation pattern of a normal symbol. , 17, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 29 are set. In step S8844, the stop (lighting) mode of the normal symbol display 333 (LED 84) is also determined.

  If the first lottery first winning flag is not ON (NO in step S8842), it is determined whether or not the first lottery second winning flag is ON (step S8846). At this time, if the first lottery second winning flag is ON (YES in step S8846), the first lottery second winning hour variation display pattern setting process is executed (step S8848). This first lottery second per hour variation display pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation display pattern corresponding to the short lottery result. Specifically, from the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 54) described later, any one of the variation patterns (variation PT) 2, 4, 6, and 28 corresponding to the length based on the random number for determining the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. Or one is set. In step S8848, the stop (lighting) mode of the normal symbol display 333 (LED 84) is also determined.

  If the first lottery second winning flag is not OFF (NO in step S8846), neither the first lottery first winning flag nor the first lottery second winning flag is ON. Processing is executed (step S8850). The first lottery variation display pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation display pattern corresponding to a lost lottery result. Specifically, from a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 54) described later, variation patterns (variation PT) 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, Any one of 11, 13, 16, 18, 21, 23, 26, and 27 is set. In step S8850, the stop (lighting) mode of the normal symbol display 333 (LED 84) is also determined.

  After that, according to the variation pattern set in any of the first lottery first per hour variation display pattern setting process, the first lottery second per hour variation display pattern setting processing and the first lottery variation display pattern setting processing The variation time is set in the timer (step S8852), and the normal LED operation flag is set to ON (step S8854). When the normal LED activation flag is set to ON, symbol variation on the normal symbol display 333 (LED 84) is started. Thereafter, “2” is set in the first job flag (step S8856), and the first lottery variation display pattern setting process is terminated.

  Incidentally, the variation pattern set in the first lottery variation display pattern setting process is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763 by the sub-integrated board command transmission process (step S92) shown in FIG. For example, when the variation pattern “1” is set corresponding to the deviation, the command “40H01H” as the first command indicating the variation time “10800” is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763. If the variation pattern “17” is set corresponding to the long hit, the command “40H11H” as the first command indicating the variation time “42000” is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763. When the variation pattern “2” is set corresponding to the short hit, the command “40H02H” as the first command indicating the variation time “10800” is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763. The normal symbol variation process on the sub-integrated board 763 side will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52, when the first changing process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the first job flag is “2” (step S8860). If the first job flag is not “2” (NO in step S8860), the first changing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first job flag is “2” (YES in step S8860), it is further determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer in step S8852 has expired (step S8862). If the variation time set in the timer has not expired (NO in step S8862), the first variation processing is terminated.

  If the variation time set in the timer has expired (YES in step S8862), the ordinary LED operation flag is set to OFF (step S8864). When the normal symbol LED operation flag is set to OFF, the symbol variation on the normal symbol display 333 (LED 84) is terminated. Then, the symbol change of the normal symbol executed by the sub-integrated board 763 is stopped, and a confirmation stop command (for example, the command “4FH01H”) for confirming and displaying the lottery result is set on the effect display device 115 (step S8866). This fixed stop command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763 by the sub-integrated board command transmission process (step S92) shown in FIG. 45, details of which will be described later.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the first lottery first winning flag or the first lottery second winning flag is ON (step S8868). If the first lottery first winning flag or the first lottery second winning flag is ON (YES in step S8868), “3” is set to the first job flag described above (step S8870), and the first variation processing Ends. On the other hand, if neither the first lottery first winning flag nor the first lottery second winning flag is ON (NO in step S8868), “0” is set to the first job flag described above (step S8872). The first variation process is completed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53, when the first winning combination actuating process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the first job flag is “3” (step S8880). If the first job flag is not “3” (NO in step S8880), the first winning combination actuating process is terminated.

  If the first job flag is “3” (YES in step S8880), it is further determined whether or not the first lottery first winning flag described above is ON (step S8882). At this time, if the first lottery first winning flag is ON (YES in step S8882), the operation time of the second movable piece 81 (the opening time of the special symbol start port 82) is a long opening time (for example, “ 5700 ms ") is set in the timer (step S8884).

  Then, a first winning electric role release effect pattern command that is a command for instructing an effect pattern corresponding to the length executed by the sub-integrated board 763 is transmitted (step S8886). Specifically, the command “50H02H” is transmitted as the first electrification opening effect pattern command, and the sub-integrated board 763 that has received the command displays an effect pattern that makes the player aim the special symbol start opening 82. Although displayed on the device 115, details will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the first lottery first winning flag is not ON (NO in step S8882), it means that the first lottery second winning flag is ON. Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is an advantageous gaming state (short time state) based on the above-described advantageous state flag (step S8888), and if it is an advantageous gaming state (short time state) (YES in step S8888), a short hit Nevertheless, as the operation time of the second movable piece 81 (the opening time of the special symbol start port 82), a long opening time (for example, “5700 ms”) is set in the timer (step S8884), and Similarly, the first winning combination release effect pattern command is transmitted (step S8886).

  On the other hand, if it is not in the advantageous gaming state (short time state) (NO in step S8888), the short opening time (for example, “108 ms”) is set as the operation time of the second movable piece 81 (opening time of the special symbol start port 82). Is set in the timer (step S8890). In addition, when winning shortly without being in advantageous game (short time), transmission of the first winning combination release effect pattern command as in step S8886 is not performed. In other words, even if the short win is won, the effect display device 115 does not display that the short win has been won, and the special symbol start port 82 is opened only for a short period by the operation of the second movable piece 81. become. More specifically, the main area of the effect display device 115 includes the case where the display mode for the loss selection (for loss) is determined and the case where the display mode for the short hit is determined. Display modes that are close to each other are displayed.

  After that, the second movable piece 81 is operated by the normal accessory driving mechanism 334 to perform the electric character opening control for opening the special symbol starting port 82 (step S8892). Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (long open time or short open time) for which the timer is set has elapsed (step S8894). If the timer has passed the predetermined time (YES in step S8884), the normal accessory driving mechanism 334 stops the second movable piece 81 and performs the electric symbol closing control for closing the special symbol starting port 82. Is performed (step S8896), then, the above-described first job flag is set to “0” (step S8898), and the first winning combination actuating process is terminated. If the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S8894), the process returns to step S8894, and the power release control is executed until the predetermined time elapses.

However, in the processing of steps S8892 to 8896 according to this embodiment, when a long open time (for example, “5700 ms”) is set in the timer as the operation time of the second movable piece 81, the first The second movable piece 81 is moved a plurality of times so that it is impossible to enter the game ball into the special symbol starting port 82 for a specific time out of the time required for the drive control of the second movable piece 81. Open / close operation is performed (special control means). Such drive control can be realized by sequentially executing the following jobs “1” to “6” according to a schedule, for example. However, in this case, it is necessary to operate the timer so that it operates only for jobs “1”, “3”, and “5”.
Job “1”: a first job for opening the second movable piece 81 for “2000 ms” so that a game ball can enter the special symbol start port 82.
Job “2”: a second job for closing the second movable piece 81 for “1000 ms” so that a game ball cannot enter the special symbol start port 82.
Job “3”: a third job for opening the second movable piece 81 for “1700 ms” so that a game ball can enter the special symbol start port 82.
Job “4”: a fourth job for closing the second movable piece 81 for “850 ms” so that a game ball cannot enter the special symbol start port 82.
Job “5”: a fifth job for opening the second movable piece 81 for “2000 ms” so that a game ball can enter the special symbol start port 82.
Job “6”: a sixth job for closing the second movable piece 81 so that the game ball cannot enter the special symbol start port 82 in accordance with the time-up of the timer. .
In such a configuration, the total time during which the game ball can enter the special symbol starting port 82 when the second movable piece 81 is opened and closed a plurality of times is the time set in the timer. Is equal to

  Note that in the first winning combination actuating process shown in FIG. 53, the process in the main control board 765 and the process in the sub-integrated board 763 are actually executed independently according to the timer interrupt in each board. However, in this embodiment, for convenience of explanation and easy understanding, the processing in the main control board 765 and the processing in the sub-integrated board 763 are described as sequential processes that are continuous as a series of processes.

  Here, the relationship between various commands (variation patterns) and the variation content displayed on the effect display device 115 will be described based on the variation pattern table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. Each command (variation pattern) relating to the first lottery means (ordinary symbol success / failure judgment means 602) transmitted from the main control board 765 is composed of 2-byte data. Includes information on fluctuation contents, winning information by lottery, and information on fluctuation time. When the command (variation pattern) transmitted from the main control board 765 is received by the sub-integrated board 763, the sub-integrated board 763 interprets the command (variation pattern). Based on the command (variation pattern), the operation control of the liquid crystal control board 758 and the display control on the effect display device 115 are performed. In the present embodiment, each command (variation pattern) is composed of two data parts: a “status” indicating the type of command and a “mode” indicating the contents executed according to the status. . For example, in the command “40H01H”, the first “40H” indicates the status, and the last “01H” indicates the mode.

<7. Special design and special electric accessory control processing>
Next, details of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (second game process) will be described. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the second game process, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the second start detection process, and FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the second lottery / variation start process. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the second lottery variation display pattern setting process, FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the second variation process, and FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the second small winning combination actuating process. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the second jackpot opening process, FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process, and FIG. 63 shows an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbol. FIG.

  The special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S86 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 45 will be described below as a “second game process”. As shown in FIG. 55, the main control MPU 765a performs, as “second game processing”, second start detection processing (step S8600), second lottery / variation start processing (step S8602), and second lottery variation display pattern setting processing. (Step S8604), second variation processing (Step S8606), second small hitting instrument operating process (Step S8608), second big hitting opening process (Step S8610), and special electric bonus hitting control process (Step S8612) ) In order. Details of each process will be described below.

  First, as shown in FIG. 56, when the second start detection process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the second start detection flag is ON (step S8620). The second start detection flag is set to ON by the switch input process (step S74) when the second start port sensor 317 detects that a game ball has entered the special symbol start port 82. If the second start detection flag is ON (YES in step S8620), an illegal winning confirmation process for confirming whether or not the special symbol starting port 82 has been illegally executed is executed (step S8622). For example, in this illegal winning confirmation process, the opening operation of the special symbol starting port 82 by the second movable piece 81 is performed at a timing that is not the original opening timing of the special symbol starting port 82, or the game is performed by the second starting port sensor 317. When a sphere is detected, processing such as issuing a warning (alert) is performed. And it is discriminate | determined whether the special figure reservation ball number count by the 2nd holding means 613 is smaller than 1 (step S8624). If the special figure reserved ball count is smaller than 1 (YES in step S8624), a second start storage storage process is executed in which the random number extracted by the special symbol per-determination random number extracting means 611 is held in the second holding means 613 ( Step S8626). Specifically, in the second start storage storing process, a special symbol hit determination random number, a variation pattern determination random number, and the like are stored as start information in the start information storage area for the special figure hold in the main built-in RAM. Note that after the second start storage storage process (step S8626) is executed, the second start detection process is terminated. The second start detection process is also ended when the second start detection flag is OFF (NO in step S8620) or when the special figure reservation ball count is 1 or more (NO in step S8624).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57, when the second lottery / variation start process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the second job flag is “0” (step S8630). The second job flag is a flag for instructing a processing stage relating to a special symbol. Here, when the symbol variation of the special symbol is not performed (for example, a state where the demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device 115), the second job flag is set to “0”. If the second job flag is not “0” (NO in step S8630), other processing related to the special symbol (for example, during the variation of the special symbol) is being executed, so the second lottery / variation start processing Exit.

  If the second job flag is “0” (YES in step S8630), it is further determined whether or not there is a second start-up memory in second holding means 613 (step S8632). If there is a second start memory (YES in step S8632), a second start memory transfer process is executed (step S8634). Specifically, in the second start storage transition process, the start information stored in the start information storage block 0 with special figure hold is read and stored in a predetermined processing area. Thereafter, the start information in the start information storage block 1 is shifted to the start information storage block 0. If the second start memory is 0 in step S8632 (NO in step S8632), the second lottery / variation start process is terminated.

  After performing the second start memory transition process in step S8634, it is determined whether the hit determination random number of the start information stored in the predetermined processing area is a jackpot value (step S8636). At this time, if it is a jackpot value (YES in step S8636), the second jackpot flag is turned ON (step S8638). The second jackpot flag is a flag that is set when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, if it is not the big hit value (NO in step S8636), the second small hit flag is turned ON (step S8640). The second small hit flag is a flag that is set when a small hit is won. Thereafter, “1” is set to the second job flag described above (step S8642), and the second lottery / variation start process is terminated. As described above, in the second lottery / variation start process, the lottery result does not include a loss, and either the small win or the big win is always won.

  In the present embodiment, only 347 types of special symbol hit determination random numbers are prepared. Among these hit determination random numbers, the two types of random number values coincide with the hit determination value (that is, the jackpot value) indicating that the jackpot is won, and 345 types of random number values correspond to the small hits (per bonus item). ) Matches the winning determination value (that is, the small hit value that is a determination value other than the big hit value) indicating that the player has won. In other words, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be much higher than the probability of winning the jackpot, and it corresponds to the lottery result in which no privilege is given to the player. No judgment value (so-called deviation) is provided.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58, when the second lottery variation display pattern setting process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the second job flag is “1” (step S8650). If the second job flag is not “1” (NO in step S8650), the second lottery variation display pattern setting process is terminated.

  If the second job flag is “1” (YES in step S8650), it is further determined whether or not the aforementioned second jackpot flag is ON (step S8652). At this time, if the second jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S8652), the second lottery jackpot hour variation display pattern which is a variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot lottery result is selected (step S8654). Specifically, a variation pattern (variation PT) corresponding to the jackpot is selected from a special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 63) to be described later based on a random number for determining a variation pattern of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, since the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot is only “6”, this variation pattern is selected. In step S8654, the stop (lighting) mode of the special symbol display 332 (LED 87) is also determined.

  If the second big hit flag is not ON (NO in step S8652), it means that the second small hit flag is ON. Therefore, the second lottery small hit fluctuation which is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the lottery lottery result A display pattern is selected (step S8656). Specifically, one of the variation patterns (variation PT) 1 to 5 corresponding to the small hit is selected from a special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 63) to be described later based on a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Is done. In step S8656, the stop (lighting) mode of special symbol display 332 (LED 87) is also determined.

  After that, either the second lottery big hit hourly fluctuation display pattern or the second lottery little hit hourly fluctuation display pattern is set together with the winning information command (that is, a command indicating a big hit or a small hit). (Step S8658). Furthermore, a variation time corresponding to the set variation pattern of the second lottery large hitting time variation display pattern or the second lottery small variation hourly variation display pattern is set in the timer (step S8660), and a special LED The operation flag is set to ON (step S8662). When the special symbol LED operation flag is set to ON, the symbol variation in the special symbol indicator 332 (LED 87) is started. Thereafter, “2” is set in the second job flag described above (step S8664), and the second lottery variation display pattern setting process is terminated.

  By the way, the variation pattern set in the second lottery variation display pattern setting process is transmitted to the sub integrated board 763 by the sub integrated board command transmission process (step S92) shown in FIG. For example, when the variation pattern “6” is set corresponding to the jackpot, the command “10H06H” of the variation time “8000” is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763. When the variation pattern “1” is set corresponding to the small hit, the command “10H11H” of the variation time “1400” is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763. The special symbol variation process on the sub-integrated board 763 side will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59, when the second changing process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the second job flag is “2” (step S8670). If the second job flag is not “2” (NO in step S 8670), the second changing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second job flag is “2” (YES in step S 8670), it is further determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer in step S 8660 has expired (step S 8672). If the variation time set in the timer is not up (NO in step S8672), the second variation processing is terminated.

  If the variation time set in the timer has expired (YES in step S8672), the special figure LED operation flag is set to OFF (step S8674). When the special symbol LED operation flag is set to OFF, the symbol variation on the special symbol indicator 332 (LED 87) is terminated. Then, the symbol change of the special symbol executed by the sub-integrated board 763 is stopped, and a confirmation stop command (for example, the command “1FH01H”) for confirming and displaying the lottery result is set on the effect display device 115 (step S8676). This fixed stop command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763 by the sub-integrated board command transmission process (step S92) shown in FIG. 45, details of which will be described later.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the second jackpot flag is ON (step S8678). If the second jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S 8678), “4” is set to the second job flag described above (step S 8680), and the second changing process ends. On the other hand, if the second jackpot flag is not ON (NO in step S8678), “3” is set to the above-described second job flag (step S8682), and the second changing process is terminated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60, when the second small hitting object activation process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the second job flag is “3” (step S8690). If the second job flag is not “3” (NO in step S 8690), the second small hitting tool operating process is terminated.

  If the second job flag is “3” (YES in step S 8690), a second small hit release effect pattern command which is a command for instructing an effect pattern corresponding to the small hit executed by the sub-integrated board 763 is transmitted. (Step S8692). Specifically, the command “20H03H” is transmitted as the second small hitting opening effect pattern command, and the sub-integrated board 763 that has received the command displays an effect pattern that causes the player to aim at the grand prize winning opening 141. The details will be described later.

  Then, the operating time of the first movable piece 142 (the opening time of the big prize opening 141, the first predetermined period) is set in the timer (the second small hit opening first timer is set) (step S8694). The first movable piece 142 is operated by the winning opening opening / closing mechanism 335 to perform the opening operation of the special winning opening 141 and perform the special electric accessory opening control (step S8696). Then, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won in the center accessory 91 based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the prize opening sensor 330 (step S8698). When winning in the center bonus 91 (YES in step S8698), a bonus input signal indicating winning in the center bonus 91 is output to the sub-integrated board 763 (step S8700). Based on the accessory input signal, a predetermined effect operation is performed in the effect display device 115 or the like.

  Then, a timer that counts the elapsed time since the game ball has won the grand prize opening 141 is set (the second timer is set to open the second small hit) (step S8702), and the big prize opening 141 is open. It is determined whether or not (the first movable piece 142 is in an open state) (step S8704). If the special winning opening 141 is being opened (YES in step S8704), it is determined whether or not the second small hit opening first timer has passed a predetermined time (step S8706). If the second small hitting opening first timer has elapsed (YES in step S8706), the first prize piece opening / closing mechanism 335 operates the first movable piece 142 to perform the closing action of the big prize opening 141. Upper special electric accessory closing control is performed (step S8708).

  After the execution of the upper special electric accessory closing control (step S8708), the special winning opening 141 is not being opened (NO in step S8704), or the second small hit opening second timer has not passed the predetermined time. (NO in step S8706), it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 331 (that is, the V winning sensor 331 is ON) (step S8710). If the V winning sensor 331 is ON (YES in step S8710), an in-function specific detection signal indicating that a game ball has won a specific area 344 in the center accessory 91 is output to the sub-integrated board 763 (step 37). In step S8712), the sub-integrated board 763 performs a predetermined effect operation in the effect display device 115 and the like based on the in-object specific detection signal. Then, the second small hit game big hit flag is turned ON (step S8714), the above-mentioned second job flag is set to “4” (step S8682), and the second small hit bonus item operating process is ended. The second jackpot game jackpot flag is a flag that is set when a jackpot is won via the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, if the V winning sensor 331 is not ON (NO in step S8710), it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the discharge sensor 313 (that is, the discharge sensor 313 is ON) (step S8718). If the discharge sensor 313 is not ON (NO in step S8718), it is further determined whether or not the second small hit opening second timer has elapsed a predetermined time (here, 20 seconds) (step S8720). If the second small hit release second timer has passed the predetermined time (YES in step S8720), since the elapsed time after winning the big prize opening 141 has passed 20 seconds, a discharge detection signal described later is output. In step S8722, “0” is set in the above-described second job flag (step S8726), and the second small winning combination actuating process is terminated. As a result, when 20 seconds elapse after the game ball wins the specific area 344 (that is, V win), the process proceeds to the next process regardless of whether or not the game ball remains in the center accessory 91. Is possible. If the second small hit release second timer has not passed the predetermined time (NO in step S8720), the process returns to step S8704.

  On the other hand, if the discharge sensor 313 is ON (YES in step S8718), it means that the game ball has won the normal area 345 in the center accessory 91. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the number of detections (winning number) by the winning mouth sensor 330 and the number of detections (discharge number) by the discharge sensor 313 are the same. (Step S8724). If the number of winnings and the number of discharges are the same (YES in step S8724), a discharge detection signal indicating that the game balls have been discharged from the center accessory 91 is output to the sub-integrated board 763 (step S8722). ), The sub-integrated board 763 performs a predetermined effect operation in the effect display device 115 or the like based on the discharge detection signal. Then, “0” is set to the above-described second job flag (step S8726), and the second small winning combination actuating process is ended. On the other hand, if the number of winnings and the number of discharges are not the same (NO in step S8724), it indicates that the game balls have not been discharged from the center accessory 91, and the process returns to step S8704.

  If no prize has been won in the center combination 91 (NO in step S8698), it is determined whether or not the second small hit opening first timer has passed a predetermined time (step S8728). If the second small hit opening first timer has elapsed (YES in step S8728), the top special electric accessory closing control is performed in the same manner as described above to close the special winning opening 141 (step S8729). On the other hand, if the second small hit release second timer has not passed the predetermined time (NO in step S8706), the process returns to step S8698.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61, when the second big hit opening process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the second job flag is “4” (step S8730). If the second job flag is not “4” (NO in step S8730), the second jackpot opening process is terminated.

  If the second job flag is “4” (YES in step S8730), it is determined whether or not the second jackpot flag is ON (step S8732). Here, if the second jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S8732), it indicates that the jackpot has been won by a combination of special symbols, so an effect pattern corresponding to the jackpot start round executed by the sub-integrated board 763 The second jackpot opening command which is a command for instructing is set (step S8734). Specifically, the command “20H01H” is transmitted as the second jackpot opening command, and the sub-integrated board 763 that has received the command displays an effect pattern for starting the jackpot game on the effect display device 115. Then, a second jackpot opening timer for counting the execution time of the jackpot game start round is set (step S8736), and “1” of the jackpot game start round is set in the round counter (step S8738). Then, “5” is set in the second job flag described above (step S8740), and the second big hit opening process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the second jackpot flag is not ON (NO in step S8732), it indicates that the jackpot has been won by passing through the specific area 344, and therefore, the jackpot start round via the jackpot executed by the sub-integrated board 763. A second small hit game big hit opening command, which is a command for designating an effect pattern corresponding to, is set (step S8742). Specifically, the command “20H04H” is transmitted as the second jackpot game jackpot opening command, and the sub-integrated board 763 that has received the command has a stage pattern that starts the jackpot game different from the jackpot by a combination of special symbols. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 115. Then, the second small hit game big hit opening timer for counting the execution time of the big hit game start round is set (step S8744), and “2” of the big hit game start round is set in the round counter (step S8746). This is because “1” in the big hit game start round is considered to have already been executed by the opening operation of the big winning opening 141 in the small hit game. Then, “5” is set in the second job flag described above (step S8740), and the second big hit opening process is terminated.

  Note that the variation patterns (second jackpot opening command and second jackpot gaming jackpot opening command) set in the second jackpot opening process are sub-integrated by the sub-integrated board command transmission process (step S92) shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the board 763.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62, when the special electric utility jackpot process is started, the main control MPU 765a determines whether or not the second job flag is “5” (step S8750). If the second job flag is not “5” (NO in step S8750), the special electric utility jackpot process is terminated.

  If the second job flag is “5” (YES in step S8750), it is determined whether or not the jackpot opening time counted by the second jackpot opening timer or the second jackpot gaming jackpot opening timer has increased (step). S8752). If the jackpot opening time is not up (NO in step S8752), the special electric utility jackpot process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big hit opening time is up (YES in step S8752), the lower drive hole 83 (opening / closing device) is opened by the attacker drive mechanism 339 (step S8754). Then, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the opening / closing device has passed (step S8756). If the opening time has passed (YES in step S8756), the lower large winning opening 83 (opening / closing device) is operated by the attacker drive mechanism 339. Is closed (step S8758). Even if the opening / closing time of the switchgear has not elapsed (NO in step S8756), if the maximum number of game balls is won in the switchgear (YES in step S8760), the attacker drive mechanism 339 lowers The large side prize opening 83 (opening / closing device) is closed (step S8758). If the maximum number of game balls has not won in the switchgear (NO in step S8760), the process returns to step S8754.

  After the opening device is closed, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing operation of the opening device has reached a predetermined number of rounds (here, 15 rounds) (step S8762). Specifically, the determination of the number of rounds is executed based on whether or not the value stored in the round counter reaches “15”. If the predetermined number of rounds has been reached (YES in step S8762), the jackpot flag (second jackpot flag or second jackpot game jackpot flag) is set to OFF (step S8764). Then, “0” is set to the second job flag described above (step S8766), and the special electric utility jackpot process is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined number of rounds has not been reached (NO in step S8762), 1 is added to the round counter (step S8768). Then, an interval command which is a command for instructing an effect pattern corresponding to the interval between jackpot game rounds executed by the sub-integrated board 763 is transmitted (step S8770), and the special electric accessory jackpot process is ended.

  By the way, although not shown, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined number of rounds is executed by the special electric utility jackpot processing described above (that is, all of the series of operations of the jackpot game are all performed). When executed), a short-time function activation process is performed as a post process of the special electric utility jackpot process.

  In this short-time function operation process, first, the advantageous state flag indicating that the player is in an advantageous gaming state (short-time state) advantageous to the player is registered (stored in a memory such as a RAM) (advantage state starting means). Next, a counter value of a duration counter indicating a period in which the registration of the advantageous state flag is continued is set. Thus, during the period indicated by the counter value of the continuation period counter, the short win is won in the lottery process performed in accordance with the game ball entering the normal symbol starting port 96. Also, the second movable piece is arranged so that a game ball can enter the special symbol starting port 82 only for a time (for example, “5700 ms”) indicated by the operation time information associated with the per-length. The drive control 81 is performed (FIG. 53: steps S8888 and S8884).

  Here, the continuation time counter according to this embodiment is set to “0” every time when the driving control of the second movable piece 81 is performed by the normal hit game execution means 607 (step S8882). By counting down to this point, the advantageous duration of the gaming state is indicated as the counter value. In other words, in this embodiment, when driving the second movable piece 81, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state flag is being registered (advantageous state determining means). As a result, when it is determined that the advantageous state flag is being registered (counter value> 0), the counter value is counted down. As a result of such processing, when the counter value becomes “0”, the registration of the advantageous state flag is canceled (deleted from a memory such as a RAM) (advantage state ending means). In such a configuration, even if the lottery process according to the game ball entering the special symbol start opening 82 is not performed, the second movable piece 81 is operated for a predetermined number of times so-called time saving. The state ends. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball at the special symbol starting port 82 only at the timing when the probability of entering the specific area 344 is the highest during the short-time state. Registration may be an operation of data (for example, an operation from “0” to “1”). The cancellation of registration may also be a data operation (for example, an operation from “1” to “0”).

  Incidentally, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific area 344 when the advantageous state flag is not registered, the continuation counter is displayed after the jackpot game corresponding to the game ball is performed. 2 "(first registration period) is set. Further, when a game ball enters the specific area 344 when the advantageous state flag is registered, the continuation counter is set to a counter value (5) after the jackpot game corresponding thereto is performed. (Second registration period) is set (super advantageous state means). When the jackpot is won, a counter value of “5” is set in the duration counter after a jackpot game corresponding to this is performed regardless of whether or not the advantageous state flag is registered. In this embodiment, the advantageous control means means means for performing the process of step S8892 when the advantageous state flag is registered.

  Note that the second small hitting member actuating process shown in FIG. 60 and the special electric accessory big hitting process shown in FIG. 62 are actually performed on the main control board 765 and the sub-integrated board 763. It is executed independently according to the timer interrupt at. However, in this embodiment, for convenience of explanation and easy understanding, the processing in the main control board 765 and the processing in the sub-integrated board 763 are described as sequential processes that are continuous as a series of processes.

  Here, based on the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 63, the relationship between various commands (variation patterns) and variation contents displayed on the effect display device 115 will be described. The commands (variation patterns) relating to the second lottery means (special symbol design determination unit 612) transmitted from the main control board 765 are each composed of 2-byte data, and each command (variation pattern). Includes information on fluctuation contents, winning information by lottery, and information on fluctuation time. When the command (variation pattern) transmitted from the main control board 765 is received by the sub-integrated board 763, the sub-integrated board 763 interprets the command (variation pattern). Based on the command (variation pattern), the operation control of the liquid crystal control board 758 and the display control on the effect display device 115 are performed. In the present embodiment, each command (variation pattern) is composed of two data parts: a “status” indicating the type of command and a “mode” indicating the contents executed according to the status. . For example, in the command “10H01H”, the leading “10H” indicates the status, and the trailing “01H” indicates the mode.

[Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 775 will be described. First, the payout control side power-on process will be described, followed by the payout control side timer interruption process, various prize ball stock addition processes, prize ball stock monitoring process, payout ball removal determination setting process, payout setting process, ball removal setting Processing will be described. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control side power-on process, FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the payout control side power-on process of FIG. 64, and FIG. 66 is a payout control side following FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control side timer interrupt process, and FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of a prize ball stock number addition process. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning ball stock number addition process, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the stock monitoring process, and FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout ball removal determination setting process. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout setting process, and FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball removal setting process. The award ball stock number adding process, the winning ball stock number adding process, the stock monitoring process, and the payout ball removal determination setting process are the main operation setting processes in step S264 in the payout control side power-on process described later. The priority order is set in the order of a prize ball stock number addition process for a prize ball, a prize ball stock number addition process for a rented ball, a stock monitoring process, and a payout ball removal determination setting process.

<1. Discharge control side power-on processing>
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 performs payout control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. When the payout control side power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 775a sets an interrupt mode (step S200). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of the interruption of the payout control MPU 775a. In this embodiment, a payout control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when this payout control side timer interrupt process is interrupted, the process is preferentially performed. Subsequent to step S200, input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) is performed (step S202). In this I / O input / output setting, an I / O port input / output setting of the payout control MPU 775a is performed. Following step S202, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S204). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suddenly stopped) occurs, the voltage decreases, and when the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage signal is input as a power outage notice. A power failure signal is input when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage. Therefore, in the wait timer process 1, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Subsequent to step S204, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 769 is operated (step S206). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 769 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the payout control MPU 775a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 769 is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 769 is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 769 is operated in step S206, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S208), while when the RAM clear switch 769 is not operated in step S206, the payout A value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S210). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in, for example, a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 775a. This is a flag indicating whether or not to delete payout information (details will be described later) relating to payout, such as the number and various flags (and various information stored in various information storage areas). A value of 1 is set when deleting, and a value of 0 is set when not paying out information. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S208 and step S210 is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the payout control MPU 775a.

  Following step S208 or step S210, it is determined whether or not the ball removal switch 779 is operated (step S212). This determination is made based on whether or not the ball removal switch 779 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the payout control MPU 775a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the ball removal switch 779 is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the ball removal switch 779 is not operated.

  When the ball removal switch 779 is operated in step S212, a value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG (step S214). On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 779 is not operated in step S212, the ball removal flag 7 A value 0 is set in RMV-FLG (step S216). This ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are to be discharged. Value 1 when discharging the game balls, when not discharging the game balls Each value is set to 0. Note that the ball removal flag RMV-FLG set in step S214 and step S216 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 775a.

  Subsequent to step S214 or step S216, a setting for permitting access to the payout internal RAM is performed (step S220). With this setting, the payout internal RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out. Subsequent to step S220, the stack pointer is set (step S222). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S222, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S222, it is determined whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S224). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S224, that is, when the payout information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S226). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout internal RAM as a numerical value. Subsequent to step S226, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control side power-off process (power-off) described later (step S228). . If they match, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S230). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG stores or holds payout backup information such as payout information, a checksum value, and a value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG in the payout internal RAM in the payout control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the payout control side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the payout control side power-off process is not normally terminated.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S230, that is, when the payout control side power-off process has been completed normally, the work area of the payout internal RAM is set as power recovery (step S232). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the payout control MPU 775a (hereinafter referred to as “payout built-in ROM”). Time information is set in the work area of the payout internal RAM. Here, “when power is restored” includes, in addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, as well as the state where the power is restored after the power failure or the instantaneous power failure as described above.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S224, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum values do not match in step S228, or step If the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S230, that is, if the payout control side power-off process has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout built-in RAM is cleared (step S234). Then, the work area of the payout built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S236). In this setting, initial information is read from the payout built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S232 or step S236, interrupt initialization is performed (step S238). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when payout control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 1.75 ms. Subsequent to step S238, interrupt permission is set (step S240). With this setting, the payout control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S238, that is, every 1.75 ms.

  Following step S240, it is determined whether a power failure signal is input (step S242). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure signal is input as a power failure warning when the voltage is equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S242 is performed based on this power failure signal. When no power failure signal is input in step S242, it is determined whether or not the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S244). This 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 1.75 ms in a payout control timer interrupt process processed every 1.75 ms, which will be described later. The value is set to 0 when 75 ms has not elapsed. When the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S244, that is, when 1.75 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S242 to determine whether or not a power failure signal is input. On the other hand, when the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S244, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 0 (step S246), and the external watchdog is set. A clear signal is turned ON to the timer (external WDT) 775c (step S248). The external WDT 775c is for monitoring the operation (system) of the payout control MPU 775a. When the external WDT 775c is not cleared within a certain period, the payout control MPU 775a is reset (whether the system of the payout control MPU 775a is not running out of control). Diagnosed).

  Subsequent to step S248, port output processing is performed (step S250). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout internal RAM from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 775b, and various signals are output based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, ACK information indicating that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 765 have been normally received, drive information for controlling drive to the ball payout device 170, and the ball payout device actually playing the game Various information such as information on the number of balls that have been paid out, LED display information displayed on the error LED display 777, and reception completion information that indicates that a rent request signal from the prepaid card unit 1a has been received normally. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 765 when the various commands relating to the payout from the main control board 765 are normally received from the output terminal based on the output information, and the driving signal is sent to the ball payout device 170. Or the number of balls actually paid out by the ball dispensing device 170 as a prize ball number signal (in this embodiment, Each time the dispensing device 170 actually pays out 10 game balls, a prize ball number signal is output.), A display signal is output to the error LED display 777, or a loan request from the prepaid card unit 1a. When the signal is normally received, a reception completion signal is output to the prepaid card unit 1a.

  Subsequent to step S250, port input processing is performed (step S252). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 775b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the error release switch 778, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 102, a detection signal from the counting switch 101, a detection signal from the full switch 107, a renting request signal and a connection signal from the prepaid card unit 1a, An ACK signal from the main control board 765 that informs that the main control board 765 has normally received various commands transmitted in a command transmission process described later is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S252, timer update processing is performed (step S254). In this timer update process, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but when the ball dispensing device 170 determines whether or not the sphere is caused, the sphere detection time, the sphere detection time set as the determination condition is set. The ball removal determination time set when the game balls stored in the tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are discharged, and is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the lower plate 31 is full. Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the ball payout device 170 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on a detection signal from a ball break switch (not shown) provided in the ball payout device 170. Time management such as the ball breakage determination time set as the determination condition when performing the above. For example, when the sphere collision determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 1.75 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted by 1.75 ms. Since the subtraction result is a value of 0, the sphere collision determination time is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, and the ball breakage determination time is set to 119 ms. By subtracting 1.75 ms at a time and the subtraction result becomes 0, the ball removal determination time and the full tank determination time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout internal RAM as time management information.

  Following step S254, CR communication processing is performed (step S256). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined whether or not a rent request signal from the prepaid card unit 1a is input, or the prepaid card unit It is determined whether or not the connection signal from 1a is input. When a lending request signal is input and the lending request signal is normally received, reception completion information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area described above, and the lending request signal is paid out as lending information. Store in the rented ball information storage area of the internal RAM. On the other hand, when the ball rental request signal cannot be normally received, the ball rental request error information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area of the payout built-in RAM.

  When a connection signal is input, CR connection information that indicates that the connection with the prepaid card unit 1a is normal is stored in the state information storage area. When the connection signal is not input, CR connection information indicating that the connection with the prepaid card unit 1a is abnormal is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S256, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S258). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the lower plate 31 is filled with game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 107. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls taken into the ball payout device 170 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on a detection signal from a ball break switch provided in the ball payout device 170. Or For example, whether or not the lower tray 31 is full of game balls is determined by using a timer interruption period of 1.75 ms, and a detection signal from the full tank switch 107 in the current full tank and out of ball check processing. Is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank switch 107 is turned OFF in the previous full (1.75 ms before) full ball and out of ball check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 107 is changed from OFF to ON. In some cases, the timer update process in step S254 starts counting the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 107 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 107 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower tray 31 is full of game balls is stored in the state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 107 is OFF, it is stored in the state information storage area area that the lower plate 31 is filled with the game ball and the fact that it is not full is informed.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the ball payout device 170 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interruption period 1.75 ms, When the detection signal from the switch is ON, the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned OFF in the previous full (1.75ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON from OFF When the transition is made, the counting of the ball breakage determination time (119 ms) described above is started in the timer update process in step S254. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON in the full tank and ball break check processing. Determine. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON, ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the ball payout device 170 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is stored in the state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the ball break switch is OFF, ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the ball payout device 170 is not more than a predetermined number is stored in the state information storage area. To do.

  Following step S258, command reception processing is performed (step S260). In this command reception process, various commands relating to payout from the main control board 765 are received. When the various commands are normally received, ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, connection abnormality information that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775 is stored in the state information storage area described above. . A detailed description of various commands related to payout from the main control board 765 will be described later.

  Following step S260, command analysis processing is performed (step S262). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S260 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S262, main operation setting processing is performed (step S264). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball scoring are performed, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. A detailed description of these operation settings and monitoring will be described later.

  Following step S264, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S266). In this LED display data creation process, various types of information are read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 777 of the payout control board 775 is created, and LED display information is stored in the above-described output information storage area. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned ball piece information is read from the state information storage area, display data corresponding to this ball piece information is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S266, command transmission processing is performed (step S268). In this command transmission process, various information is read out from the state information storage area described above, a command is created based on the various information, and is transmitted to the main control board 765.

  Following step S268, the clear signal to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 775c is turned off (step S270). As a result, the external WDT 775c is cleared to prevent the payout control MPU 775a from being reset, and the external WDT 775c starts timing.

  Following step S270, the process returns to step S242 again to determine whether or not a power failure signal is input. If this power failure signal is not input, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S244. When the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a value 1, that is, when 1.75 ms elapses, the value 1. is set in the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG in step S246, and the step In step S248, a clear signal is output to the external WDT 775c, port output processing is performed in step S250, port input processing is performed in step S252, timer update processing is performed in step S254, CR communication processing is performed in step S256, and step S258 is performed. Perform full tank and out of ball check processing, receive command in step S260 In step S262, command analysis processing is performed. In step S264, main operation setting processing is performed. In step S266, LED display data creation processing is performed. In step S268, command transmission processing is performed. In step S270, the external WDT 775c is cleared. A signal is output, and Steps S242 to S270 are repeated. The processing from step S242 to step S270 is referred to as “payout control side main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game on the main control board 765, the processing content of the payout control side main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 775a varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU 775a preferentially outputs to the main control board 765 an ACK signal notifying that various commands related to payout from the main control board 765 have been normally received in the port output process of step S250. As a result, the payout control MPU 775a secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure signal is input in step S242, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S272). With this setting, payout control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected. Subsequent to step S272, the output of the drive signal to the ball payout device 170 is stopped (step S274). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped. Following step S274, the clear signal is turned ON / OFF to the external WDT 775c (step S276). This clears the external WDT 775c. Subsequent to step S276, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S278). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S226 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG. Subsequent to step S278, a value 1 is set to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG. (Step S280) This completes the storage of the payout backup information. Subsequent to step S280, prohibition of access to the payout internal RAM is set (step S282). With this setting, access to the payout internal RAM is prohibited, and writing and reading cannot be performed, and the payout backup information stored in the internal payout RAM is protected. Following step S282, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the clear signal is not turned ON / OFF to the external WDT 775c. For this reason, the payout control MPU 775a is reset, and then the payout control MPU 775a performs the payout control side power-on process again. The processing from step S272 to step S282 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control side power-off processing”.

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 775a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the payout control side power-on process is performed by power recovery thereafter.
In step S228, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout built-in RAM is normal. In step S230, it is checked whether or not the payout control side power-off process has been normally completed. I am inspecting. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

<2. Payout control side timer interrupt processing>
Next, payout control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control side timer interruption process is repeatedly performed at every interruption period (1.75 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control side timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 67 (step S290). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control side main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control side timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control side main processing from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S290, a value 1 is set in the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S292). The 1.75 progress flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms every time the payout control side timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 1.75 ms. Each value is set to 0 when .75 ms has not elapsed. Subsequent to step S292, the register is switched (returned) (step S294). This return is performed by reading the contents saved on the stack in step S290 and writing them to the register. Subsequent to step S294, interrupt permission is set (step S296), and this routine ends.

<3. Various prize ball stock addition processing>
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The prize ball stock number addition process includes a prize ball prize ball number addition process and a rental ball prize ball number addition process. The prize ball prize ball number addition process is performed from the main control board 765. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later. It is. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially, and according to the number of prize balls stock added in this prize ball stock number addition process. After the game balls are paid out by the ball payout device 170, a setting is made such that the number of winning ball stocks for lending is added.

  When the award ball stock number addition process is started, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 determines whether or not there is a prize ball command as shown in FIG. 68 (step S300). This determination is made based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S262 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout internal RAM. In step S300, the received command information is read from the received command information storage area to determine whether the command is a prize ball command.

  If the received command information is a prize ball command in step S300, the prize ball number PBV corresponding to the prize ball command is read from the prize ball number information table (step S302). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout control ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV. Subsequent to step S302, the winning ball stock number PBS is read from the payout built-in RAM (step S304). This award ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the ball payout device 170, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in this embodiment. ing. As a result, the award ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 65535. The prize ball number PBV read in step S302 is added to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S304 (step S306), and this routine ends. After the addition in step S306, the prize ball command read in step S300 is erased from the received command information storage area.

On the other hand, if the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S300, this routine is ended as it is.
Next, the winning ball stock number adding process for renting a ball will be described. When the processing for adding the number of prize balls for renting is started, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 determines whether or not there is a lending request signal as shown in FIG. 69 (step S310). This determination is made based on the lending request signal from the prepaid card unit 1a in the port input process in step S252 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S310, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a lending request signal.

  When there is a lending request signal in step S310, the winning ball stock number PBS is read from the payout built-in RAM (step S312), and the lending number RBV is added to this award ball stock number PBS (step S314), and this routine is terminated. To do. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout control ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. In addition, after adding in step S314, the rent request signal read in step S310 is deleted from the input information storage area. In the present embodiment, priority is given to prize balls (the prize balls and the rental balls are managed separately). For this reason, even when there is a ball rental request signal, the ball rental request signal is held, and when the prize ball is paid out, the ball is paid out. Accordingly, the rented ball is paid out after the prize ball stock PBS becomes zero.

On the other hand, when there is no lending request signal in step S310, this routine is ended as it is.
<4. Stock monitoring process>
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not the game is continued in a state where the player has filled the game ball in the lower plate 31 during the game (stocked state).

  When the stock monitoring process is started, as shown in FIG. 70, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout built-in RAM (step S320). It is determined whether or not the threshold value is equal to or greater than a careful threshold value TH1 (step S322). The alert threshold TH1 is set to a value of 50 in this embodiment. When the prize ball stock PBS is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH1 in step S322, the value 1 is set to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S324). This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player has started to stock game balls in the lower plate 31, and that the number of game balls that have not been paid out (the number of prize ball stocks described above) has reached the caution threshold TH1 or more. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the threshold value exceeds the caution threshold value TH1, and to a value of 0 when the threshold value does not exceed the threshold value TH1.

  Subsequent to step S324, it is determined whether or not the prize ball stock number PBS read out in step S320 is greater than or equal to the warning threshold value TH2 (step S326). The warning threshold value TH2 is set to a value 300 in this embodiment. When the prize ball stock PBS is greater than or equal to the warning threshold value TH2 in step S326, the warning flag WA-FLG is set to 1 (step S328), and this routine is terminated. This warning flag WA-FLG indicates that the player has started to stock game balls on the lower plate 31, and that the number of game balls that have not been paid out (the number of prize ball stocks described above) has reached or exceeded the warning threshold value TH2. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the warning threshold value TH2 or higher is reached, and to a value of 0 when the warning threshold value TH2 or higher is not reached.

  On the other hand, if the prize ball stock PBS is less than the caution threshold TH1 in step S322, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to 0 (step S330), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the prize ball stock PBS is less than the warning threshold value TH2 in step S326, the warning flag WA-FLG is set to 0 (step S332), and this routine is terminated.

  If the gaming state becomes a big hit and the player relaxes and sees an effect unfolded on the effect display device 115, or looks into the action of the ornament main body 302, the player inadvertently makes one round. During this time, the game balls paid out as prize balls may not be removed from the lower plate 31 by operating the lower plate ball discharge button (not shown). If the game is continued in this state, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock PBS increases to become a warning threshold value TH1 and a warning threshold value TH2, which will be described in detail later. As a warning effect, a guidance voice flows from the speakers 18 and 57. Then, even if the player can be in a relaxed state where the game state is a big hit, if the game ball is not inadvertently pulled out from the lower plate 31, a warning effect will be performed, which will be annoying. It might be.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such discomfort as much as possible, in this embodiment, as described above, the value 300 is set to the warning threshold value TH2. This warning threshold TH2 is set to the number of game balls to be paid out as award balls for two rounds. For example, when one game ball enters the lower side big winning opening 83, when paying out 15 pieces as prize balls, one round (in this embodiment, the lower big winning opening 83 is opened from the closed state). Then, after 30 seconds have passed since the 15 game balls entered or opened, the lower big prize opening 83 returns from the open state to the closed state again.) The number of game balls to be paid out as a ball is 150 (= 15 × 10) when 10 game balls enter the lower large winning opening 83, and 300 (150 × 2) for two rounds. . If the storage capacity of the prize ball stock PBS is 1 byte (8 bits), only 0 to 255 unpaid balls can be stored. Then, by setting the storage capacity of the prize ball stock PBS to 2 bytes (16 bits), it is possible to store 256 or more unpaid balls.

  On the other hand, the alert threshold value TH1 is set to a value of 50, which is a stage before the prize ball stock PBS reaches the alert threshold value TH2, and will be described in detail later. By turning on the award ball lamp 396 as an effect, for example, the hall clerk can be informed that the player is careful about the game of the player, and the hall clerk informs the player that the game ball is to be removed from the lower plate 31. I can tell you. Thereby, the player can prevent the game from continuing further in a state where the game ball is full in the lower plate 31. In addition, even if the player is in a relaxed state where the gaming state is a big hit, even if the player does not inadvertently pull out the game ball from the lower plate 31, the player in the hall will not be able to The fact that the game ball is to be pulled out from the lower plate 31 is notified, and an annoying situation can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the alert threshold value TH1 is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). It is set to 1/6 of the value 300 of TH2. As a result, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player should be alerted to the game at the earliest possible stage.

<5. Dispensing ball removal determination setting process>
Next, the payout ball removal determination setting process will be described. In the payout ball removal determination setting process, the game balls are paid out to the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 31 by the ball paying device 170, or the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are discharged from the pachinko machine 1. This is a process for setting whether to perform such payout or discharge.

  When the payout ball removal determination setting process is started, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 determines whether or not the ball ball flag PBE-FLG is a value 1 as shown in FIG. S340). The ball ball flag PBE-FLG will be described in detail later, but is set to a value of 1 when the ball payout device 170 performs a ball ball movement operation, and to a value of 0 when the ball ball ball movement operation is not performed. Is set.

  In step S340, when the ball ball flag PEB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when the ball ball movement operation is not performed, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the payout internal RAM (step S342), It is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 (step S344). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there is a number of unpaid balls in the game ball payout by the ball payout device 170.

  When the prize ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 in step S344, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 31 is full of game balls (step S346). This determination is made based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and ball runout check process in step S258 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout internal RAM. In step S346, the full tank information is read from the state information storage area to determine whether or not the lower tray 31 is full of game balls.

  When the lower tray 31 is not full of game balls in step S346, a payout setting process described later is performed (step S348), and this routine is terminated. As a result, the game balls are paid out to the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 31. On the other hand, when the lower plate 31 is full of game balls in step S346, this routine is finished as it is. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the ball dispensing device 170 is forcibly stopped when the lower tray 31 is full of game balls. When a prize ball is generated while the ball dispensing device 170 is forcibly stopped, the number of balls that have not been paid out by the ball dispensing device 170 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is calculated by the prize ball stock number calculation process shown in FIG. It will be added to increase.

  On the other hand, in step S340, when the ball pitching flag PBE-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the ball pitching operation is performed, or in step S344, the prize ball stock number PBS is not greater than the value 0 (value 0). That is, when there is no unpaid ball number, it is determined whether or not the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a value 1 (step S350). As described above, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are to be discharged. The value is set to 0 when the ball is not discharged. The determination in step S350 is made based on the determination result in step S214 in the payout control side power-on process shown in FIG. That is, when an operation signal is input from the ball removal switch 779 of the payout control board 775, the value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG in step S214 in the payout control side power-on process, while the operation signal is If not input, a value 0 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG in step S216 in the payout control side power-on process.

  When the ball removal flag RMV-FLG has a value of 1 in step S350, that is, when the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are discharged, a ball removal setting process described later is performed (step S352). Exit the routine. Thereby, the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are discharged.

  Here, when the power is turned off and then the power is turned on while the ball removal switch 779 is pressed, the ball removal setting process is performed in step S352 of the payout ball removal determination setting process and stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150. The game balls that have been made can be discharged. When this discharge is completed, a value 0 is set in the ball removal flag RMV-FLG.

  On the other hand, when the ball removal flag RMV-FLG has a value of 0 in step S350, that is, when the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are not discharged, this routine is ended as it is. As a result, game balls are not paid out or discharged.

Next, the payout setting process will be described. This payout setting process is a process for driving the ball payout device 170 to make a setting for paying out game balls.
When the payout setting process is started, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 reads the drive command number DRV from the payout built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 72 (step S360). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the ball paying device 170, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. Subsequent to step S360, it is determined whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S362). In this determination, it is determined based on the drive command number DRV whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the ball payout device 170 remains. When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S362, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the ball payout device 170 is zero, output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the ball payout device 170 is set. (Step S364). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the ball payout device 170 and stored in the output setting storage area of the above-described payout internal RAM. Subsequent to step S364, the winning ball stock number PBS is read from the payout built-in RAM (step S366), and the real ball count PB is read (step S368). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the ball payout device 170. This count will be described in detail later, but in the port input process of step S252 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal.

  Subsequent to step S368, the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S368 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S366 is set in the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV (step S370). The actual ball count PB is set to 0 (step S372), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are 0, in step S372, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S366 is set as it is to the drive command number DRV.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S362, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the ball payout device 170, an output of a drive signal to the ball payout device 170 is set. (Step S374). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal is set in the ball payout device 170 and stored in the output setting storage area. Following step S374, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 102 (step S376). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 102 in the port input process of step S252 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S376, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 102.

  When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 102 in step S376, the drive command number DRV is subtracted by 1 (decremented, step S378), and it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the counting switch 101 (step S380). ). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 101 in the port input process of step S252 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S380, the input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 101.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 101 in step S380, the actual ball count PB is incremented by 1 (incremented, step S382), and this routine is terminated. In step S382, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 101 in step S380, this routine is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 102 in step 276, it is determined whether or not the ball collision determination time has elapsed (step S384). This determination is performed based on the ball collision determination time updated in the timer update process in step S254 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball collision determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S384, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball collision determination time has elapsed. It should be noted that the ball dispensing device 170 performs a ball collision operation during the ball collision determination time. This ball collapsing operation is performed in order to eliminate a state where a game ball taken into the ball passage (not shown) of the ball dispensing device 170 is clogged.

  If it is determined in step S384 that the ball collision determination time has not elapsed, an output of a drive signal to the ball dispensing device 170 is set so as to perform the ball collision operation (step S386). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the ball payout device 170 is set and stored in the output setting storage area of the payout built-in RAM described above. Subsequent to step S386, a value of 1 is set in the sphere ball flag PBE-FLG (step S388), and this routine is terminated. This in-bending ball flag PBE-FLG is set to a value of 1 when a ball-bending operation by the ball dispensing device 170 is performed, and to a value of 0 when a ball-bending operation is not performed. On the other hand, when the ball collision determination time has elapsed in step S384, a stop of the drive signal to the ball dispensing device 170 is set so as to end the ball collision operation (step S390). In this setting, driving information for stopping the driving signal is set in the ball dispensing device 170 and stored in the output setting storage area. Subsequent to step S390, a value of 0 is set in the spherical ball flag PBE-FLG (step S392), and this routine is terminated.

  Next, the ball removal setting process will be described. In this ball removal setting process, the ball dispensing device 170 is driven to discharge the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150.

  When the ball removal setting process is started, the payout control MPU 775a of the payout control board 775 determines whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed as shown in FIG. 73 (step S400). This determination is made based on the ball removal determination time updated in the timer update process in step S254 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball removal determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S400, the time management information is read from this time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed. During the ball removal determination time, the ball dispensing device 170 performs a ball removal operation. This ball removing operation is performed to discharge the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150.

When the ball removal determination time has not elapsed in step S400, the output of the drive signal to the ball dispensing device 170 is set to perform the ball removal operation (step S402). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the ball payout device 170 is set and stored in the output setting storage area of the payout built-in RAM described above. Subsequent to step S402, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is set to 1 (step S404), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the ball tank 136 and the tank rail 150 are to be discharged. The value is set to 0 when the ball is not discharged. On the other hand, when the ball removal determination time has elapsed in step S400, a stop of the drive signal to the ball dispensing device 170 is set to end the ball removal operation (step S406), and this routine is finished. In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the ball payout device 170 and stored in the output setting storage area.
[Various commands related to payout]
Next, various commands related to payout will be described. As described above, the main control board 765 performs control for transmitting a game ball payout command (prize ball command) to the payout control board 775 (payout control means). First, a command transmitted from the main control board 765 to the payout control board 775 will be described, followed by a state command of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the payout control board 775 to the main control board 765, and a shaping state command obtained by shaping this state command Will be described. 74 is a prize ball number information table showing an example of a payout command, FIG. 75 is a table showing an example of a status command, and FIG. 76 is a table showing an example of a shaping status command obtained by shaping the status command.

<1. Prize ball command>
The prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board 65 to the payout control board 775. For example, a prepaid card unit 1a is connected to the pachinko machine 1 (a device that communicates with the pachinko machine and supplies the pachinko machine to the pachinko machine as a rental ball by driving a payout motor of the pachinko machine ("CR machine"). )) Are arranged adjacent to each other, as shown in FIG. 74A, command ball commands transmitted from the main control board 765 to the payout control board 775 include commands 10H to 1EH ( “H” represents a hexadecimal number.), One award ball is designated in the command 10H, two award balls are designated in the command 11H,..., And a prize ball 15 is designated in the command 1EH. Has been. The payout control board 775 controls the payout device 170 to drive out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, in the case where a ball rental machine (a device that pays out game balls directly as a rental ball on the upper plate (referred to as “general machine (cash machine)”)) is disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5B, command 20H to command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 765 to the general machine. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, and the prize is given by the command 21H. Two balls are designated, and a prize ball 15 is designated in the command 2EH. The general machine performs control for paying out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine (self-check command), and the self-check is designated in the command 30H. This self-check command is not for paying out a prize ball, but for checking the connection state between the main control board 765 and the payout control board 775, and is common to CR machines and general machines. Used.

  Here, a CR machine and a general machine (cash machine) will be described. In the CR machine, a prepaid card corresponding to the number of balls to be lent is purchased in advance at a ticket vending machine, and the prepaid card unit 1a disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 is inserted into the prepaid card 1 (ball A game ball is paid out as a rental ball from the payout device 170). Specifically, when the prepaid card is inserted into the prepaid card unit 1a, the balance information is read from the prepaid card by a card reader built in the prepaid card unit (not shown). The prepaid card unit 1a outputs a ball rental request signal to the pachinko machine 1 based on the balance information, and the pachinko machine 1 pays out a game ball as a ball from the ball payout device 170. On the other hand, in a general machine (cash machine), a dedicated machine for renting a ball is arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 '. By putting cash in the dedicated machine for rental balls, the dedicated machine for rental balls pays out game balls as rental balls based on the cash.

  The CR machine has a probability variation function that is not permitted for general machines, and is more popular among players in terms of euphoria than general machines. For this reason, sales of CR machines are managed by a third party as a countermeasure against tax evasion of the hall. Specifically, the prepaid card unit 1a can perform infrared communication with a sales information collection terminal, and the sales information collection terminal is connected to an information collection center of a prepaid card company by wire. This allows prepaid card companies to manage hall sales information.

  By the way, when a game machine 5 for CR machine having a probability variation function is mounted on a pachinko machine 1 ′ equipped with a payout control board 775 ′ for a general machine instead of the game board 5 ′ for a general machine, In spite of the pachinko machine 1 ′ for general machines, it is possible to allow a player to play a game using a CR machine having a probability variation function. For this reason, the player likes to play the popular CR machine and plays the game. Then, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 ′ on which the payout control board 775 ′ is mounted for a general machine is arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 ′ and connected to the information collection center of the prepaid card company. As a result, sales information is not transmitted to third parties. As a result, the hall illegally obtains sales by providing such a fraudulent game to the player.

  In this embodiment, the prize ball command has a storage capacity of 1 byte, that is, 8 bits, and the upper 4 bits of the 8 bits are used as a prize ball command for a CR machine or a prize ball for a general machine. Used as information that can be identified in the command. On the other hand, the lower 4 bits of the 8 bits are used as information for designating the number of game balls to be paid out to the player. As described above, the prize ball command for the CR machine is preset to 10H to command 1EH, and the prize ball command for the general machine is preset to 20H to command 2EH. In this way, the value 1 is designated for the CR machine in the upper 4 bits and the value 2 is designated for the general machine in the upper 4 bits, so that a transmission register (not shown) is initialized when the power is turned on, and the value 0 is set. Even if it is (default value), the lower 4 bits have a value of 0 and one prize ball is indicated, but since the upper 4 bits have a value of 0, a prize ball command for a CR machine, a prize for a general machine Does not correspond to any of the ball commands. Thus, even when a default value is transmitted to the payout control board 775 when the power is turned on, the payout control board 775 is discarded as an invalid command. The self-check command also has a storage capacity of 1 byte, that is, 8 bits, and the upper 4 bits among the 8 bits are used as a self-check command that is a common command for the CR machine and the general machine. As described above, the self-check command is 30H. In this way, any one of the adjacent 2-bit information for the CR machine can designate a prize ball command for a CR machine, a prize ball command for a general machine, or a self-check command. In 775, upon receiving the award ball command and the self-check command for the CR machine, the award ball command and the self-check command for the CR machine are discriminated and accepted based on the same 2-bit information adjacent to each other. When the payout control board 775 ′ receives the prize ball command and the self-check command for the general machine, the prize ball command and the self-check command for the general machine are discriminated and accepted based on the adjacent 2-bit information. Thereby, for example, even if the game machine 5 for the CR machine equipped with the main control board 765 having the probability variation function is mounted on the pachinko machine 1 ′ for the general machine, the general machine mounted on the pachinko machine 1 ′. If the payout control board 775 ′ for the CR machine normally receives the award command for the CR machine, it outputs an ACK signal to that effect to the main control board 765, but discards the received award ball command for the CR machine. It is like that. Therefore, even if the game board 5 'for the general machine is replaced with the game board 5 for the CR machine and the player plays a game, the player does not pay out the game ball as a prize ball.

<2. Status command>
The status command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and transmitted from the payout control board 775 to the main control board 765. As shown in FIG. 75, the status command is divided into a frame status, an error cancellation navigation, and a stock display, and priorities are set in the order of the frame status, error cancellation, and stock display. In the frame state, ball breakage, ball removal, connection abnormality, and CR disconnection are prepared. When the ball breaks, bit 0 (B0, “B” represents a bit) is set to 1 and the ball removal is performed. Among them, the value 1 is set to the bit 2 (B2), the value 1 is set to the bit 3 (B3) when the connection is abnormal, and the value 1 is set to the bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. Of the status commands, bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) for indicating that the frame is in the state are set to a value of 1 for B5, a value of 0 for B6, and a value of 0 for B7.

  The error canceling navigation requires a ball, a count switch error, and a retry upper limit error. The value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) in the case of a ball, and the value is set to bit 3 (B3) in the case of a count switch error. 1 is set, and the value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) in the retry upper limit error. Here, the “counting switch error” indicates whether or not a malfunction of the counting switch 101 of the ball dispensing device 170 has occurred. The “retry upper limit error” indicates that a payout that is not consistent is repeatedly performed. Of the status commands, bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) for indicating that the error cancellation navigation is performed are set to a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and a value 0 for B7.

  The stock display requires 50 or more stocks and 300 or more stocks. In 50 or more stocks, bit 1 (B0) is set to value 1, and in stocks of 300 or more stocks. The value 1 is set in bit 1 (B1). Of the status commands, bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) for indicating the stock display are set to a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and a value of 0 for B7.

<3. Formatting command>
The main control MPU 765a of the main control board 765 transmits various commands to the sub integrated board 763. These various commands are commands having a storage amount area of 2 bytes (16 bits), have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a status indicating the type of the command, and 1 byte (8 bits). It has a storage capacity and is composed of a mode that shows variations of performance. When the main control MPU 765a receives the above-described state command from the payout control board 775, as shown in FIG. 76, the main control MPU 765a sets the additional information “10000001B (= 81H)” to the status and sets the received state command to the mode. It is set and shaped into a shaping state command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). This shaping state command is performed as one process of the sub integrated board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 45, and is transmitted to the sub integrated board 763. Note that the detailed description of the shaping state command is the same as the contents of the state command described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

[Functional configuration of sub-integrated board]
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a functional block diagram schematically showing a functional configuration of a sub-integrated board constituting the peripheral board.
The sub-integrated board 763 includes a command receiving means 630 for receiving a command transmitted from the command transmitting means 620 of the main control board 765, a normal symbol image display control means 631, a special symbol image display control means 632, and a liquid crystal control board. And command transmission means 710 for transmitting a command to 758.

  The command receiving means 630 receives the effect command for the first lottery means (ordinary symbol success / failure determination means 602) transmitted from the main control board 765 and the effect for the second lottery means (special symbol success / failure determination means 612). The command and the command of the effect related to the lottery when the game ball enters the first game area (specific area 344) in the center accessory 91 are received. The command from the main control board 765 is received by external interrupt reception, and the analysis execution is performed in a 16 ms steady process.

  When the command receiving unit 630 receives an effect command related to the first lottery means, the normal symbol image display control means 631 displays the lottery information display area according to the effect command related to the first lottery means. Control is performed so as to be displayed on both (main area) 1151 and game information display area (sub area) 1152. More specifically, it is the liquid crystal control board 758 that directly controls the display on the effect display device 115, but the display mode according to the effect command relating to the first lottery means is the lottery information display area 1151 and A command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 758 via the effect command transmission means 710 so that it is displayed in both of the game information display areas 1152.

  When the special symbol image display control means 632 receives an effect command relating to the second lottery means by the command receiving means 630, the display mode corresponding to the effect command relating to the second lottery means is determined in the lottery information display area. Control is performed so that the information is displayed in both the display area 1151 and the game information display area 1152. More specifically, as described above, it is the liquid crystal control board 758 that directly controls the display on the effect display device 115, but the display mode corresponding to the effect command related to the second lottery means is the lottery information display. A command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 758 via the effect command transmission means 710 so that it is displayed in both the area 1151 and the game information display area 1152.

  The liquid crystal control board 758 performs display control of the effect display device 115 according to the command received from the effect command transmission means 710 of the sub-integrated substrate 763. The display content (variation content) that is display-controlled by the effect display device 115 will be described later.

  By the way, the special symbol image display control means 632 includes state information setting means 704 for setting the display control state in the lottery information display area 1151 and the game information display area 1152, and state information for canceling the setting of the state information setting means 704. Release means 706 and second modification means for modifying the command received by the command reception means 630 when the command is a predetermined command (specifically, a command related to special symbol effect based on a lottery lottery result) 708.

  When the command receiving unit 630 receives an effect command related to the second lottery means by the command receiving unit 630, the state information setting unit 704 performs lottery display control according to the effect command related to the second lottery means. A flag indicating that the state is performed in both the information display area 1151 and the game information display area 1152 is set.

  When the series of display control (including display control related to the accessory lottery) in response to the reception of the second command in the lottery information display area 1151 and the game information display area 1152 is completed, the state information release unit 706 The flag setting in the information setting unit 704 is canceled (the prohibition by the prohibiting unit is canceled). Note that the end of the series of display control in the lottery information display area 1151 and the game information display area 1152 is an effect command for the second lottery means received by the command receiving means 630 (for example, the above-described fixed stop command (command “ 1FH01H "etc.).

  On the other hand, the normal symbol image display control unit 631 determines whether or not the flag is set in the state information setting unit 704, and the command reception unit 630 based on the determination in the state information determination unit 700. And a first modification means 702 for modifying the command received by.

  The first modifying means 702 modifies the effect command relating to the first lottery means received from the command receiving means 630 when the state information judging means 700 determines that the flag is set by the state information setting means 704. To do. An effect command relating to the modified first lottery means is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 758 via the effect command transmission means 710. On the other hand, if the flag is not set by the status information setting unit 704, the command for the effect relating to the first lottery means received from the command receiving means 630 is not changed by the first changing means 702, and the effect command is transmitted. It is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 758 via the means 710.

[Control by sub-integrated board]
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a time chart for presentation display control by the main control board, the sub-integrated board, and the liquid crystal control board.

  When the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37 passes through the normal symbol start port 96 and is detected by the first start port sensor 318, the first lottery means of the main control board 765 performs the first lottery process. Then, the normal symbol display 333 displays the variation of the normal symbol. For example, if the result of the first lottery process is out of order and the selected variation PT is “PT normal 1”, the command “40H01H” is transmitted from the main control board 765 to the sub integrated board 763. As shown in FIG. 54, the command “40H01H” is a command indicating that the result of the first lottery process is out of place and the fluctuation time is a normal fluctuation of 10800 ms.

  The sub-integrated board 763 (more specifically, the state information determining unit 700 of the normal symbol image display control unit 631) that has received the command from the main control board 765 determines whether or not the flag is set by the state information setting unit 704. to decide. Here, according to FIG. 78, since the flag is not set (that is, neither the special symbol nor the special electric accessory effect is displayed in the lottery information display area 1151), the sub integrated board 763 is the main control board 765. The command “40H01H” received from is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 758 without modification.

  When the liquid crystal control board 758 receives a command from the sub-integrated board 763, the liquid crystal control board 758 controls display of the effect displayed on the effect display device 115 in accordance with the received command. According to FIG. 78, since the liquid crystal control board 758 has received the command “40H01H”, the liquid crystal control board 758 starts the fluctuation of the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 according to the received command and displays the lottery information display. In the area 1151, the normal symbol production is started.

  The main control board 765 transmits the command “4FH01H” when the variation time of 10800 ms corresponding to the command “40H01H” elapses, starting from when the variation of the normal symbol is started in the normal symbol display 333. This command “4FH01H” is a command for instructing to stop the change of the normal symbol in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 of the liquid crystal control board 758 and stop the effect of the normal symbol in the lottery information display area 1151.

  The liquid crystal control board 758 that has received the command “4FH01H” stops the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol corresponding display region 1154 and stops the normal symbol effect in the lottery information display region 1151.

  Furthermore, the result of the first lottery process by the first lottery means performed by passing the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 96 is a long hit, and the selected variation PT is “PT 18”. If there is, the command “40H11H” is transmitted from the main control board 765 to the sub integrated board 763. As shown in FIG. 54, the command “40H11H” is a command indicating that the result of the first lottery process is a long hit and the fluctuation time is a normal fluctuation of 42000 ms.

  The sub integrated board 763 that has received the command from the main control board 765 determines whether or not the flag is set by the state information setting unit 704. Here, since the flag is not set according to FIG. 78, the sub-integrated board 763 transmits the command “40H11H” received from the main control board 765 to the liquid crystal control board 758 without modification.

  When the liquid crystal control board 758 receives a command from the sub-integrated board 763, the liquid crystal control board 758 starts to change the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 in response to the received command “40H01H” and starts to produce the normal symbol in the lottery information display area 1151. .

  When the variation time 42000 ms corresponding to the command “40H11H” elapses from the time when the variation of the ordinary symbol is started in the ordinary symbol display 333, the main control board 765 causes the variation of the ordinary symbol in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154. A command “4FH01H” is transmitted to instruct to stop and stop the production of the normal symbol in the lottery information display area 1151. At this time, in any of the normal symbol display 333, the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, and the lottery information display area 1151, it is displayed that the result of the first lottery process by the first lottery means is winning.

  When it is displayed in the normal symbol display 333, the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, and the lottery information display area 1151 that the result of the first lottery processing by the first lottery means is a win, a special interval period is passed, The second movable piece 81 that closes the symbol start port 82 is opened (that is, the reject ball mode is switched to the allowed ball mode). At this time, the main control board 765 transmits the command “50H02H” to the sub-integrated board 763, and the sub-integrated board 763 transmits this command to the liquid crystal control board 758 without modification.

  The liquid crystal control board 758 that has received the command “50H02H” controls to display “Put left” as a normal electric effect effect in the lottery information display area 1151 (see FIG. 81A).

  If the game ball wins the special symbol starting port 82 and is detected by the second starting port sensor 317 while the second movable piece 81 is in the permitted ball mode, the second lottery means of the main control board 765 will be the second lottery means. The special symbol display unit 332 displays the variation of the special symbol. When the result of the second lottery process is a small hit, the command “10H01H”, “10H02H”, “10H03H”, “10H04H” and “10H05H” as the second command is selectively selected. Any command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763. On the other hand, when the result of the second lottery process is a big hit, the command “10H06H” as the second command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763 (see FIG. 63). In FIG. 78, the main control board 765 transmits the command “10H01H” to the sub integrated board 763.

  When the sub-integrated board 763 receives one of the commands “10H01H”, “10H02H”, “10H03H”, “10H04H”, “10H05H”, and “10H06H”, as described above, the state information setting unit 704 A flag is set to indicate that display control corresponding to the effect command related to the second lottery means is performed in both the lottery information display area 1151 and the game information display area 1152 (prohibiting means). Thereby, during the period when this flag is set, image output to the lottery information display area 1151 by the normal symbol image display control means 831 (display control by the third image control means) is prohibited. . Then, the command received by the modifying means 702 is modified, and the modified command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 758. For example, when the command transmitted by the sub-integrated board 763 is “10H01H”, the second modifying unit 708 modifies any of “10H11H”, “10H21H”, and “10H31H” and transmits it to the liquid crystal control board 758. . Then, the liquid crystal control board 758 starts the variable display in the special symbol corresponding display area 1155 according to the modified command and performs display control of the special symbol effect in the lottery information display area 1151. Thereby, for example, even if there are a plurality of effects corresponding to the same variation time, the command transmission of effects related to the second lottery means can be performed once, and the load on the main control board 765 can be reduced. For example, even if there are three types of effects with a variation time of 1400 ms, effects A, effects B and effects C, the main control board 765 only needs to transmit information regarding the contents of variation, winning information, and information about the variation time. It is not necessary to transmit information on which of the effects A, B, and C. In the present embodiment, the special symbol effect in the lottery information display area 1151 corresponds to a blinking display of a character (see FIG. 82 (a)).

  If the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 96 and is detected by the first start port sensor 318 while the special symbol is changed in the special symbol display 332, the first lottery means on the main control board 765 has the first lottery means. The lottery process is performed, and the normal symbol display unit 333 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. If the result of the first lottery process is, for example, a short hit and the selected variation PT is “PT 2”, the command “40H02H” is transmitted from the main control board 765 to the sub integrated board 763. . As shown in FIG. 54, this command “40H02H” is a command indicating that the result of the first lottery process is a short hit and the fluctuation time is a normal fluctuation of 10800 ms.

  The sub-integrated board 763 (more specifically, the state information determining unit 700 of the normal symbol image display control unit 631) that has received the command from the main control board 765 determines whether or not the flag is set by the state information setting unit 704. to decide. Here, since the flag is set according to FIG. 78 (that is, the special symbol effect is performed in the lottery information display area 1151), the sub integrated board 763 receives the command “40H02H” received from the main control board 765. Is changed to the command “41H02H”, and the changed command “41H02H” is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 758.

  The liquid crystal control board 758 that has received the modified command “41H02H” performs the normal symbol variable display control in the normal symbol corresponding display region 1154, but does not perform the normal symbol effect in the lottery information display region 1151. Give priority to symbol production. Note that the command “41H02H” includes the same information as the information included in the command “40H02H” regarding the first lottery process result information (winning information) and the variation time information.

  Then, when the variation time of 1400 ms corresponding to the command “10H01H” elapses from the time when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special symbol display 332, the main control board 765 sends the command “1FH01H” to the sub-integrated board 763. Send. This command “1FH01H” is a command for instructing to stop the change of the special symbol in the special symbol corresponding display area 1155 of the liquid crystal control board 758 and stop the special symbol effect in the lottery information display area 1151.

  The liquid crystal control board 758 that has received the command “1FH01H” stops the special symbol change in the special symbol corresponding display area 1155 and stops the special symbol effect in the lottery information display area 1151.

  After the special symbol change in the special symbol corresponding display area 1155 is stopped and the special symbol effect in the lottery information display area 1151 is finished, the first winning piece 141 is operated by the operation of the first movable piece 142 after a predetermined interval. At the same time, the command “20H03H” is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763. This command “20H03H” is a command indicating that the special winning opening 141 has been opened, and the liquid crystal control board 758 that has received this command transmits the received command “20H03H” to the liquid crystal control board 758 without modifying it. To do.

  The liquid crystal control board 758 that has received the command “20H03H” controls to display “Aim Up” as a special electric accessory effect in the lottery information display area 1151 (see FIG. 82B).

  Here, while the special winning opening 141 is open, even if the normal symbol is changed in the normal symbol display 333, the lottery information display area 1151 has a special electric role rather than the normal symbol effect. Product production is given priority. However, even if the special electric effect effect is given priority over the normal symbol effect in the lottery information display area 1151, as long as the normal symbol is changed in the normal symbol display 333, the normal symbol corresponding display is performed. In the area 1154, normal symbols are also changed. In other words, if the special symbol effect is given priority over the normal symbol effect in the lottery information display area 1151, even if the normal symbol is changed or stopped on the normal symbol display 333, the special symbol is displayed. In the symbol corresponding display area 1155, a special electric accessory effect is performed. However, in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, the change and stop are performed in the same manner as the display on the normal symbol display 333.

  Even if the opening of the special winning opening 141 is completed and closed, if a game ball enters the specific area 344 (first gaming area) inside the center accessory 91 due to the opening of the special winning opening 141. In the lottery information display area 1151, the special electric accessory effect is continuously performed. This special electric accessory effect is an effect related to a lottery drawing until the game ball is discharged from the first game area, that is, when the game ball enters the first game area in the center accessory 91. It is done while it is done. Then, a command related to the change or stop of the normal symbol display 333 as a game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 96 while the special electric accessory effect is being performed in the lottery information display area 1151 is a main control board 765. Even if the command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763, the command is modified by the first modifying means 702 of the sub-integrated board 763, and the modified command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 758.

  Here, when the special electric accessory effect is finished in the lottery information display area 1151, and the normal symbol fluctuates in the normal symbol display 333, the display in the lottery information display area 1151 scrolls the symbol at high speed. High speed fluctuation. This is because the command transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763 in response to the game ball passing through the normal symbol starting port 96 is modified by the first modifying means 702, so that the command transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763 is changed. This is because the information of the corresponding fluctuation content is lost.

  In addition, as described above, when a command (specifically, commands “10H01H” to “10H05H”) related to special symbol effects based on small hits is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763, the sub-integrated board 763 receives the received The command is changed to any one of “10H11H”, “10H21H”, and “10H31H” (hereinafter referred to as a change command) and transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 758. Here, the liquid crystal control board 758 does not immediately start the effect display based on the received modification command (the accessory lottery effect), but receives the winning command transmitted from the main control board 765 to the sub integrated board 763. Execute as an opportunity. In other words, the liquid crystal control board 758 reserves the start of the effect display based on the modified command (the accessory lottery effect) until the winning command is received. Note that the winning command is a command “24H02H” transmitted from the main control board 765 when a winning is made at the big winning opening 141 that is opened by winning the small win, and this command “24H02H” is a count command for the big win Also used as.

Here, when the effect display is executed in the lottery information display area 1151 (main area) and the symbol is changed in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 (sub area), when the following state occurs, The effect display in the main area ends before the symbol variation in the sub area.
-When the big prize opening 141 is opened by the small hit game, but the game ball does not win the big prize opening 141, and the small hit game effect in the main area ends before the symbol variation in the sub area.
・ A game ball won in the big prize opening 141, and the game ball does not pass through the specific area 344 in the center role 91 (that is, V winning), and in the main area before the symbol fluctuation in the sub area When the lottery production of the feature ends.
-When a jackpot game is executed by winning a V, and at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot game effect in the main area ends before the symbol change in the sub area.

  That is, these three timings are a series of display controls (including a small hit game effect and an accessory lottery effect) performed in response to the reception of an effect command (a command related to a special symbol effect) relating to the second lottery means. This corresponds to the timing when the process ends. Then, at the timing when such a series of display control ends, as described above, the flag setting in the state information setting unit 704 is cancelled.

  Accordingly, when the liquid crystal control board 758 receives the modification command and the effect display in the main area ends before the symbol variation in the sub-area, the main area is based on the modification command. The normal symbol production is executed. More specifically, in addition to the previous winning command, the main control board 765 has a closing command (command “23H13H” for instructing the end of small hits) or a closing command at the end of jackpot game. (A command “23H10H” instructing the jackpot ending) is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 763. When the liquid crystal control board 758 receives the close command from the sub-integrated board 763, the liquid crystal control board 758 executes the normal symbol effect in the main area based on the modification command. That is, background effect data (specifically, any one of the aforementioned A effect, B effect, and C effect) displayed in the main area is selected based on the modification command, and the background effect data is selected in the main area. The above-mentioned high-speed fluctuation display data is displayed by synthesizing the high-speed fluctuation display data in which the normal symbol is scrolled at high speed in front of the background based on the background, and the high-speed fluctuation display data is displayed in the main area.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect display in the main area is finished before the normal symbol fluctuation in the sub area, the information indicating how the normal symbol is displayed in the main area. Is included in the modification command. Then, this modification command is sent in advance to the liquid crystal control board 758, and when a predetermined command is received, the display mode of the normal symbol in the main area is switched based on the modification command. Therefore, even if the effect display in the main region ends before the normal symbol variation in the sub-region and it is necessary to switch the normal symbol variation mode in the main region, the display switching It is not necessary to perform extra processing such as sending a command, and the mode of variation of the normal symbol in the main area can be appropriately switched based on the advance command sent in advance.

  In summary, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can be classified into a first step game, a second step game, and a third step game. In the first step game, a game ball is won at the normal symbol starting port 96, and a determination is made as to whether or not the normal symbol is won by the normal symbol determination unit (first lottery unit) 602 (first lottery process). The game which derives the display mode corresponding to the first lottery process to the effect display device 115 is equivalent. In the second step game, a game ball is won at the special symbol start port 82, and a determination is made as to whether or not a special winning combination is won by the special symbol determination unit 612 (second lottery unit) (second lottery process). This game corresponds to a game in which the display mode corresponding to the second lottery process is derived to the effect display device 115. The third step game corresponds to a game (third lottery process) in which a game ball is won at the grand prize winning opening 141 and selectively distributed into an advantageous state and an unfavorable state using the rotating body 347. . However, for example, the first step game and the second step game may be performed in an overlapping manner. In this case, the effect display device 115 displays a display mode corresponding to winning a special symbol start port 82, and a display mode corresponding to winning a normal symbol start port 96 is not displayed (internally). Is the first step game). Then, when the game is distributed in an advantageous state in the third step game, the jackpot game execution means 617 executes the jackpot game.

  In this way, the jackpot game is performed when it is allocated to an advantageous state in the third step game, so the third lottery process can be interpreted as the main lottery, and the first lottery process and the second lottery process The lottery process can be interpreted as the first preliminary lottery and the second preliminary lottery, respectively. In the present embodiment, a jackpot game may be executed depending on the result of the second lottery process, but in most cases, a jackpot game is generated according to the result of the third lottery process. Therefore, it does not depart from the essence of the present invention.

  In the lottery information display area 1151, when any one of the ordinary electric effect production, the special symbol effect, and the special electric effect production is performed, each of these effects has priority over the normal symbol effect. Done. Further, when the special symbol effect or the special electric accessory effect is performed, each of these effects is given priority over both the normal symbol effect and the normal electric accessory effect. Further, when the special electric accessory effect is performed, the special electric accessory effect is given priority over any of the normal symbol effect, the ordinary electric accessory effect, and the special symbol effect. In this way, the normal symbol effect, the ordinary electric effect effect, the special symbol effect, and the special electric effect effect are displayed in the common lottery information display area 1151, and priority is given to an effect with a shorter path to the big hit game occurrence. By doing so, it is possible to produce an effect having a great influence on the occurrence of the big hit game without reducing the fluctuation efficiency of the normal symbol and the special symbol, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest.

  By the way, when the game ball does not win the special symbol start opening 82 while the second movable piece 81 is in the rejected ball mode (closed), the special symbol effect is displayed in the special symbol corresponding display area 1155. Never done. Further, the special symbol is not changed in the lottery information display area 1151 (see the two-dot chain line portion in FIG. 78). Then, as the special symbol start port 82 is closed by the second movable piece 81 (in accordance with the reject ball mode), the display in the lottery information display area 1151 changes from the normal electric accessory effect to the interval / demon effect. Switch to However, if the normal symbol is changed in the normal symbol display 333 and the normal symbol corresponding display region 1154 when the special symbol start port 82 is closed by the second movable piece 81, the normal symbol display unit 333 and the normal symbol corresponding display region 1154 The symbol effect is displayed.

  If the game ball does not enter the first game area while the first movable piece 142 is open, the display in the lottery information display area 1151 displays an interval / demo effect, a normal symbol effect, and Display control is performed on one of the ordinary electric product effects (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 78). More specifically, when the game ball does not enter the first game area while the first movable piece 142 is open, in the lottery information display area 1151, the operation of the second movable piece 81 is performed. If the special symbol start opening 82 is open (if the ball is allowed), a normal electric effect effect is displayed, and if the normal symbol fluctuates, a normal symbol effect is displayed. When the special symbol start port 82 is not opened by the operation of the second movable piece 81 and the normal symbol effect is not performed, the process returns to the interval / demonstration effect (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 78).

[About the display mode in the effect display device]
Next, a display mode in the effect display device 115 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining a display area displayed on the effect display device 115.

  The effect display device 115 is a main lottery information display area 1151 that occupies most of the entire area of the effect display device 115, and a part above the entire area of the effect display device 115 more conservatively than the lottery information display area 1151. A game information display area 1152 occupying only the game information.

  In the lottery information display area 1151, an effect relating to the first lottery means, an effect relating to the second lottery means, or a lottery when the game ball enters the first game area in the center accessory 91. Such effects are displayed. The lottery information display area 1151 is configured to display three symbols of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. Note that the “effects related to the role drawing” refers to the lottery between the time when the game ball enters the first game area in the center role 91 and the time when the game ball is distributed by the rotary sorter 294. This is an effect displayed in the information display area 1151.

  The game information display area 1152 is displayed on the hold corresponding display area 1153 corresponding to the display of the normal hold ball lamp 323, the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 corresponding to the display of the normal symbol display 333, and the special symbol display 332. And a corresponding special symbol corresponding display area 1155. That is, the hold-corresponding display area 1153 indicates the hold state of the normal symbol variation display control. Also, the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, the normal symbol variation display, and the lottery result by the first lottery means are displayed. Furthermore, the special symbol corresponding display area 1155 displays the special symbol variation display and the lottery result by the second lottery means. Thereby, it becomes possible to recognize that the lottery function for the normal winning, the lottery function for the special winning, and the holding function by the main control board 765 are functioning properly. It should be noted that other game functions (winning determination function, discharge determination function, etc.) are functioning properly can be recognized in the game information display area (main control function diagnosis area) 1152. Good. In this case, the inspection of the processing function of the main control board 765 becomes easier.

  In the hold-corresponding display area 1153, a display mode corresponding to the number of normal symbols held is displayed. That is, in the hold corresponding display area 1153, for example, if the number of normal symbols held is 1, only “L” is displayed in a bright color, and if it is 2, “L” and “2” are displayed in a bright color. The

  In the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, one of alphabets “D”, “N” and “R” is displayed, and the lottery result by the first lottery means can be grasped depending on which one is displayed. it can. When the lottery result by the first lottery means is derived, the alphabet “D”, “N”, and “R” are alternately displayed while the normal symbol is changing on the normal symbol display 333. The

  In the special symbol corresponding display area 1155, red “P” or green “P” is displayed, and the lottery result by the second lottery means can be grasped depending on which one is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result by the second lottery means is derived, the red “P” and the green “P” are alternately displayed while the special symbol is changing in the special symbol display 332. .

  Here, in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, while the normal symbol is fluctuating on the normal symbol display 333, the alphabets “D”, “N” and “R” are alternately switched and displayed. When the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol is displayed on the display 333, the display is stopped at any one of “D”, “N”, and “R”. Therefore, even if the effect relating to the first lottery means is not displayed by displaying the effect relating to the second lottery means in the lottery information display area 1151, the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 does not display the alphabet. “D”, “N” and “R” are alternately displayed.

  Also, in the special symbol corresponding display area 1155, while the special symbol is changing in the special symbol display 332, the red “P” and the green “P” are alternately switched and displayed, and the special symbol display When the result of the lottery process for the special symbol is displayed in 332, the result is stopped and displayed in either red “P” or green “P”.

  Next, a series of images displayed on the effect display device 115 as the game progresses will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83 are diagrams showing a series of flows displayed on the effect display device 115 as the game progresses. More specifically, FIG. 80 and FIG. 81 are diagrams showing effects related to the first lottery means. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing effects related to the second lottery means. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing effects related to the lottery drawing. However, for the sake of convenience, the peripheral members of the effect display device 115 are also shown in FIGS. 81 (a), 82 (a), and (b).

  When both the normal symbol and the special symbol have a holding number of zero, the display on the effect display device 115 is the display shown in FIG. That is, in the lottery information display area 1151, three identification symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the hold corresponding display area 1153, it is displayed that the number of normal symbols held is zero. In addition, in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, the alphabet is stopped and displayed in a specific alphabet without being alternately displayed. In the special symbol corresponding display area 1155, the red “P” and the green “P” are alternately switched. Stopped in any color without being displayed.

  When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 96, the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 333 is started to change, and the three identification symbols are started to be changed. Thereby, it can grasp | ascertain that the fluctuation | variation of the normal symbol started. Further, while the normal symbol is changed on the normal symbol display 333, and accordingly, while the three identification symbols are changed, the alphabet in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 is also alternately displayed. Note that the variation of the normal symbol is performed on the premise of deriving the result of the lottery process by the first lottery means.

  Then, if the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 96 while the normal symbol changes, the number of game balls that have passed through the normal symbol start port 96 is within a predetermined range (4 in this embodiment). )), The variable symbol display control is suspended. It can be understood from the display in the hold corresponding display area 1153 that the variable symbol variable display control is put on hold (see FIG. 80B). According to FIG.80 (b), it can grasp | ascertain that the number of holding | maintenance of a normal symbol is three.

  The result of the lottery process by the first lottery means is derived by the combination when all the symbols of the three identification symbols for which variable display is performed are stopped. These three identification symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol, but reach when the left symbol and right symbol are stopped and displayed in the same symbol (see FIG. 80 (c)), Reach variation is performed (see FIG. 80D).

  Note that “reach fluctuation” means that an identification symbol (left symbol and right symbol in this embodiment) other than the identification symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (in this embodiment) is a specific display that continues for a predetermined time. Stopped, swung, enlarged, reduced, or deformed in a state consistent with the result (“2” in the present embodiment), or a plurality of identification symbols fluctuated in synchronization with the same symbol, or a display symbol This means that the possibility of jackpot occurrence continues before the final result is displayed.

  When the result of the lottery process by the first lottery means is a win, all three identification symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (see FIG. 80 (e)), and then the second movable piece 81 is activated and specially displayed. It becomes easy for a game ball to win the symbol start opening 82. In the lottery information display area 1151, instead of displaying the three identification symbols, a display prompting the user to aim the game ball toward the special symbol starting port 82 is performed (see FIG. 81A). In the present embodiment, in order to urge the special symbol start port 82 arranged on the left side of the effect display device 115 to aim at the game ball, the characters “Please come to the left!” And an arrow pointing to the left are displayed.

  Note that, in the lottery information display area 1151, even if the effect relating to the second lottery means is performed instead of the effect relating to the first lottery means, if the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol is suspended, While the lottery is performed by the first lottery means, the suspension of the normal symbol variation display control is canceled and the display mode of the variation display by the three identification symbols is internally determined. When the lottery by the first lottery means is a win (that is, when it is internally determined that all three identification symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol), an effect relating to the second lottery means is performed. Even so, the second movable piece 81 is actuated to make it easier for the game ball to win the special symbol starting port 82. In other words, regardless of whether or not the effect relating to the first lottery means is displayed on the effect display device 115, if it is internally determined that all three identification symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, the second movable The piece 81 is actuated to make it easier for a game ball to win a special symbol start opening 82. Thereby, the efficiency of the lottery process by the 1st lottery means can be improved irrespective of the presence or absence of the effect display concerning the 2nd lottery means.

  As described above, when a game ball wins the special symbol start opening 82, the effect relating to the second lottery means is given priority over the effect relating to the first lottery means in the lottery information display area 1151. That is, when a game ball is won in the special symbol start opening 82, the lottery information display area 1151 is assumed to display three variable symbols in order to derive the result of the lottery process by the first lottery means. In addition, instead of the variable display (normal effect) of the three identification symbols, an effect (special effect) related to the second lottery means is performed. Thereby, the display effect (special effect) according to the lottery result for the special winning is performed step by step from the display effect (normal effect) according to the lottery result for the normal hit. It is expressed in the lottery information display area 1151 that the degree of expectation that a special game will be performed is higher.

  On the other hand, when the result of the lottery process by the first lottery means is out of the way, the normal symbol display unit 333 responds to the variation of the normal symbol on the condition that the normal symbol variation display control is suspended. The variation display of the three identification symbols is repeatedly performed.

  Note that, in the lottery information display area 1151, as described above, even if the effect relating to the second lottery means is displayed instead of the effect relating to the first lottery means, the normal symbol corresponding display in the game information display area 1152 is displayed. In an area 1154, alphabets “D”, “N” and “R” are alternately displayed. Therefore, even if the display corresponding to the lottery result by the first lottery means cannot be visually recognized in the lottery information display area 1151, the display in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 can be visually recognized, and therefore the normal symbol is fluctuating. The current situation can be grasped. In addition, since the effect relating to the second lottery means is displayed in the lottery information display area 1151 occupying most of the area of the effect display device 115, the effect relating to the second lottery means is not hindered. Can be suppressed.

  Next, when a game ball wins in the special symbol start opening 82, the character displayed in the lottery information display area 1151 is blinked and displayed while the special symbol is changing on the special symbol display 332 (FIG. 82 ( a)). Thereby, it can grasp | ascertain that the fluctuation | variation of the special symbol started. Further, while the special symbol on the special symbol display 332 is changed, and while the character is blinking, the alphabet “P” in the special symbol corresponding display area 1155 is also alternately displayed between green and red. Is done. The special symbol change is performed on the premise of deriving the result of the lottery process by the second lottery means.

  When the change in the special symbol display 332 stops, the alphabet “P” in the special symbol corresponding display area 1155 is stopped and displayed in green or red (see FIG. 82B). Thereby, the player can grasp that the result of the lottery process by the second lottery means has been derived.

  Here, if the result of the lottery process by the second lottery means is a small hit, the special symbol corresponding display area 1155 prompts the player to aim the game ball toward the big winning opening 141 instead of the blinking display of the character. Display is performed (see FIG. 82B). In the present embodiment, the characters “Aim Up” and an arrow pointing up are displayed in order to prompt the game winning ball 141 formed above the effect display device 115 to aim at the game ball.

  On the other hand, if the result of the lottery process by the second lottery means is a big hit, the special symbol corresponding display area 1155 displays the character “big hit” instead of the blinking display of the character (see FIG. 82 (c)). Then, a special game occurs.

  If the variation of the special symbol is stopped and the variation display control of the normal symbol is suspended when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the variation of the normal symbol is started again in the normal symbol display 333, A series of processes 80 (a) to (e) is repeated. Also, in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, while the normal symbol is fluctuating on the normal symbol display 333, alphabets “D”, “N”, and “R” are alternately switched and displayed. However, at this time, in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154, the display indicating that the game ball is encouraged to be aimed at the big winning opening 141 formed above the effect display device 115 is performed. Do not show.

  The timing at which the effect relating to the first lottery means ends (that is, the timing at which the variable display according to the internally determined display mode ends) and the timing at which the normal symbol variation display in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 ends. The same.

  By the way, the result of the lottery process by the first lottery means is a win, and the special information is displayed in the lottery information display area 1151 to prompt the user to aim the game ball toward the special symbol starting port 82. When a game ball does not win the symbol start port 82, three identification symbols are displayed again (see FIG. 81 (b)). However, at this time, even if the display mode of the variable display by the three identification symbols is determined internally, the variable display by the specific display mode is performed instead of the variable display by the determined display mode. . In the present embodiment, this specific display mode is a display mode in which the three identification symbols are scrolled at high speed. In addition, when the fluctuation | variation by the high speed scroll of three identification symbols is performed, the fluctuation | variation display by the said high speed scroll is performed only for the time based on the sub timer which counts the fluctuation | variation time of a normal symbol.

  When a game ball wins the big prize opening 141 and the game ball enters the first game area in the center bonus 91, the game ball that has entered the first game area is distributed by the rotary sorter 294. Until now, the lottery information display area 1151 performs effects related to the lottery of the actors (see FIG. 83A). In FIG. 83 (a), only a specific effect display related to an accessory lottery is shown, but an effect display related to this is actually performed.

  When a game ball is drawn by entering a first game area in the center game 91, FIG. 83 (b) or FIG. 83 (d) is displayed according to the lottery result. Is done. In this embodiment, when a game ball that has entered the first game area in the center accessory 91 is received in the special entrance 344, FIG. 83 (b) is displayed in the lottery information display area 1151, and then “ A “big hit” character is displayed (FIG. 83 (c)), and then a special game occurs.

  On the other hand, when a game ball that has entered the first game area in the center accessory 91 is received in the normal area 345 instead of the special entrance 344, FIG. 83 (d) is displayed in the lottery information display area 1151. After that, the display returns to the display of variation of the three identification symbols (see FIG. 83 (e)). However, at this time, even if the display mode of the variable display by the three identification symbols is determined, the specific display mode (three in the present embodiment) is not performed without performing the variable display by the determined display mode. Variation display is performed by a display mode in which the identification symbol is scrolled at high speed.

  In the present embodiment, the effects relating to the first lottery means correspond to the effects displayed in FIGS. 80A to 80E and FIG. However, when the result of the lottery process by the first lottery means is correct (see FIG. 81), it is possible to enter the game ball into the special symbol starting port 82 by the sliding operation of the second movable piece 81. Until such an aspect is completed, it corresponds to an effect relating to the first lottery means.

  Further, the effect relating to the second lottery means corresponds to the effect display of FIG. However, when the result of the lottery process by the second lottery means is a small hit (see FIG. 82 (b)), the operation of the first movable piece 142 in the form in which the big winning opening 141 is opened is completed. This is equivalent to the production of the second lottery means.

Furthermore, the effects related to the effect effect correspond to the effects displayed in FIGS. FIG. 83 (e) corresponds to an effect related to the first lottery means.
As described above, according to the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the following many excellent effects can be obtained. The effects (1) to (10) listed below are examples of effects obtained by the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

(1) The special symbol start port (second start port) 82 is provided so that a game ball can enter only when drive control of the second movable piece (movable member) 81 is performed, When the drive control of the second movable piece 81 is not performed, it is made impossible to enter a game ball into the special symbol start port 82. That is, as a necessary condition for the above jackpot game to be performed,
(A) In the lottery process performed based on the game ball entering the normal symbol starting port 96, the normal hit (first hit) that triggers the operation of the second movable piece 81 is won. To be done.
(B) A game ball is further entered into the special symbol starting port 82 that is allowed to enter when the condition (a) is satisfied.
The logical product condition of the condition (A) and the condition (B) is adopted. That is, the lottery process (S8842, S8846) according to the game ball entering the normal symbol start port 96 and the lottery process (step S8636) according to the game ball entering the special symbol start port 82 are sequentially performed. Since it is performed in a stepwise manner, a game ball enters any one of the two types of starting ports (first starting port and second starting port) 82 and 96 as viewed from the player side. It will become clear whether the handle should be operated.

  (2) The game ball that has entered the center accessory (opening / closing device) 91 is stopped at the holding device (temporary holding device) 360 for a different stopping time each time. For this reason, the time from when the game ball enters the center accessory 91 until it reaches the rotating body 347 is irregular, and the player has the highest probability of entering the specific area 344. It becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the special symbol start port 82 aiming at the point.

  (3) Since the time from when the game ball enters the center accessory 91 until it reaches the rotating body 347 is irregular, when the game ball enters the center accessory 91, the specific area Such a situation that the possibility of a game ball entering 344 is eliminated is eliminated, and thereby a sense of tension with respect to the game is suitably maintained.

  (4) Since the game ball is stopped on the guide passage (normal route) 349 leading to the rotator 347, the player comes to pay more attention to the game sphere toward the rotator 347. As a result, a decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

  (5) Since the holding device 360 stops the game ball for a different time each time on the guide passage 349, a specific area (guidance for guiding the game ball to the first outlet (special area) 388 is provided. Part) 344 and the relationship between the timing at which the suspension by the holding device 360 is released, the player can use the specific area (guide unit) 344, during the period in which the game ball is stopped by the holding device 360, As a result, it is possible to enjoy the excitement such as whether or not the game balls are distributed and drawn to the first outlet (special area) 388.

  (6) When the plurality of game balls flow down on the guide passage 349, the holding device 360 stops only one of the game balls on the guide passage 349 leading to the rotating body 347. The stopping part 406 and the discharging part 410 for discharging only the gaming balls not stopped by the stopping part 406 among the plurality of gaming balls flowing down on the guide passage 349 from the center accessory 91 are provided. In such a configuration, when a plurality of game balls flow down on the guide passage 349, only one corresponding game ball is supplied to the rotating body 347 so that only one of the game balls is supplied to the rotating body 347. It is made to stop in the stop part 406. And about the game ball which is not stopped by the stop part 406, this is discharged from the said center accessory 91. FIG. Therefore, regardless of the number of game balls that have entered the center accessory 91, the probability of entering the specific region 344 through the guide passage 349 when a game ball enters the center accessory 91 Can be made constant. That is, it is difficult to aim at the timing at which a game ball enters the specific area 344 by entering many game balls.

  (7) The second movable piece 82 is set so that the game ball cannot enter the special symbol starting port 82 for a specific time out of the time required for the drive control of the second movable piece 81. Was opened and closed several times. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the special symbol start port 82 aiming at the timing when the probability of entering the specific area 344 is the highest.

  (8) During the drive control of the second movable piece 81, different times (long opening time, short opening time) as predetermined times during which the game ball can enter the special symbol start port 82 Time determining means for determining one of a plurality of pieces of operation time information indicating (step S8884, S8890). In such a configuration, the time during which a game ball can enter the special symbol start port 82 is different, and the player has a timing at which the probability of entering the specific area 344 is the highest. It is difficult to aim the game ball into the special symbol starting port 82 aiming at it. However, on the other hand, the total time during which the game ball can enter the special symbol starting port 82 when the second movable piece 81 is opened and closed a plurality of times is determined by the time determining means. The drive control of the second movable piece 81 is performed so as to be equal to the time indicated by the time information (jobs “1” to “6”). Therefore, the time information determined by the time determining means is the total time that the game ball can enter the special symbol starting port 82 when the second movable piece 81 is opened and closed a plurality of times. Is equal to the time indicated by (2), and a specific time out of the time required for the drive control of the second movable piece 81 makes it impossible to enter the game ball into the special symbol start port 82. The fall of interest is suppressed.

  (9) Only when the operation time information associated with the long time in the operation time information is determined (step S8884), the second movable piece 81 is operated a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to favorably maintain the probability of entering the game ball into the special symbol start port 82 when the short-time information is determined (step S8890).

  (10) The advantageous game information is registered in response to the drive control of the second movable piece 81 being performed a predetermined number of times during the period (short time) during which the advantageous state flag is registered. It was decided to cancel (advantageous state ending means). In such a configuration, the second movable piece 81 has operated a predetermined number of times regardless of the number of lottery processes executed in response to the game ball entering the second special symbol start port 82. Sometimes the so-called time-saving state is forcibly terminated. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball at the special symbol starting port 82 only at the timing when the probability of entering the specific area 344 is the highest during the short-time state. That is, even during such a short time state, a game must be played so that a game ball enters the special symbol start port 82, and a sense of tension with respect to the game can be suitably maintained.

  (11) When the second movable piece 81 operates a predetermined number of times regardless of the number of lottery processes executed in response to the game ball entering the special symbol start port 82, a so-called time-saving state is established. In a game machine that is forcibly terminated, there is a possibility that the player may not enjoy all of the benefits of the so-called short-time state, which may reduce the interest of the game. However, in the above configuration, when even one game ball enters the special symbol start port 82, the lottery process in which one of the above-mentioned bonuses or jackpots is always won is performed. Is also suitably maintained.

  (12) The effect display device (effect image display device) 115 is provided as a part of the display area of the effect display device 115 after adopting the configuration described in the effect (1). A game information display area (main control function diagnosis area) 1152 in which it is possible to recognize that a plurality of internal processes relating to the progress of the game executed sequentially by the control board 765 function properly, and the effect display A lottery information display area (expectation expression area) 1151 for expressing the degree of expectation that the above-mentioned special game will be played is provided as well as occupying most of the display area of the device 115. That is, in this case, among the plurality of internal processes by the main control board 765, in particular, the game balls to the normal symbol start port (first start port) 96 and the special symbol start port (second start port) 82 It is possible to recognize that various internal processes performed in response to the entry of the ball are functioning properly through the display controls by the first image control means and the second image control means, respectively. It becomes possible to easily inspect the appropriateness of the processing function in the main control board 765. In particular, since the function of the main control board 765 is diagnosed by the monitoring function of the peripheral board 781 different from the main control board 765, the reliability of the inspection is also compared with the case of self-monitoring. And will be maintained at a high level.

  (13) In the lottery information display area (expectation expression area) 1151, the special game that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display of the monotonous lottery result by the special symbol display (game information display device) 332 is performed. It is provided as an area for expressing the degree of expectation. That is, in the lottery information display area (expectation expression area) 1151, first, display control related to normal symbols (normal display effects performed in the lottery information display region 1151 when entering the normal symbol start port 96). (Normal effect)) and display control related to special symbols (a special effect performed when entering the special symbol start opening 82, a display effect (special) with a higher expectation that a special game will be performed than the normal display effect. Only the effect image corresponding to the display control of any one of the effect)) is selectively displayed, whereby the lottery information display area (expectation expression area) serving as the output destination of the main effect image A sufficient space as 1151 is secured. Then, when a command (second command) indicating that display control relating to the special symbol should be performed is received (acquired), the lottery information display area (expectation) is received according to the received second command. The lottery information display area (expected degree expression area) 1151 by the normal symbol image display control means 631 until a series of display control (including the effect lottery effect display) started in 1151 is completed. Display control on the screen is prohibited (prohibited means). That is, due to such prohibition, in the lottery information display area (expected degree expression area) 1151, the display control by the special symbol image display control means 632 (display control by the fourth image control means) is performed by the normal symbol image display control means. The display control is performed step by step from display control 631 (display control by the third image control means). By expressing such a display mode that the degree of expectation for the special game is higher, the special effect (display control by the special symbol image display control means 632) It is performed as if it evolved from the normal effect (display control by the normal symbol image display control means 631), and the display effect based on such another lottery result is continuously performed without a sense of incongruity when viewed from the player. Will be able to. In addition, the main control board (main control means) 765 internally digests the normal effects each time during the period in which the special effects are performed on the peripheral board (sub-control means) 781. (First lottery means (normal symbol success / failure determination means 602), drive control means (ordinary winning game execution means 607), first display mode determination means (normal symbol success / failure determination means 602), etc.). Therefore, even when a long display effect is executed in the lottery information display area (expected degree expression area) 1151, the rotation efficiency, which is the time until the next lottery result is obtained, can be improved. It becomes like this.

  (14) Whether display control (display control by the third image control means) on the lottery information display area (expectation expression area) 1151 related to the normal symbol is prohibited in the peripheral board 781 (sub-control means). Regardless of whether or not, the first effect information used for the display control and the display control (image output by the first image control means) on the game information display area (main control function diagnosis area) 1152 are used. The first appropriate information is always received (acquired) at the same time by the first command. That is, when the first presentation information is acquired at the same time as the first appropriate information, it is determined whether display control by the third image control unit is prohibited. On the condition that it is determined that display control by the third image control means is not prohibited, only the effect image corresponding to the display mode indicated by the first effect information is displayed in the lottery information display area (expectation expression). (Region) 1151. In such a configuration, the first effect information used for display control by the third image control means having different execution timings for the display control and the image output by the first image control means are used. The two display controls can be properly performed while always obtaining the first appropriate information. In addition, the processing load on the main control board 765, the communication load between the main control board 765 and the peripheral board 781, and the storage capacity on the main control board 765 are reduced. The problem can be solved preferably.

  (15) The information indicated by the first command is modified (modifying means 702), and the display control by the third image control means is stopped based on the modified information. The display can be performed more appropriately.

  (16) The first lottery means has a holding function (first holding means 603, first hold releasing means 604), thereby improving the starting rate of the special symbol starting port 82. On this basis, the second lottery means is also provided with a holding function (second holding means 613 and second holding releasing means 614). Therefore, it is possible to continuously perform only the special effects with high expectation for the above-mentioned special game to be performed.

  (17) In the peripheral board 781, at the end of a series of display controls performed in response to the reception of the second presentation command (the presentation command relating to the second lottery means), the normal symbol corresponding display area (first display) 1 sub-region) 1154 determines whether or not the display control by the normal symbol image display control means (first effect image display control means) 631 (display control by the partial display control means) is being executed. (State judgment means). More specifically, it is determined whether or not the timer means for counting the scheduled time for which display control is performed in the normal symbol corresponding display area 1154 is in operation. When it is determined that the display control by the partial display control means is being performed, the high-speed display mode in which a predetermined effect image is changed at high speed appears in the lottery information display area (main area) 1151. The variable display output for the effect image displayed in the lottery information display area (main area) 1151 is performed (high-speed fluctuation output means). More specifically, display control for displaying the high-speed display mode in the lottery information display area (main area) 1151 until the timing of the scheduled time by the timer means is up, and the schedule by the timer means. The stop display mode among the display modes initially determined by the first display mode determination means (ordinary symbol success / failure determination means 602) in accordance with the timing of timing up the time is the lottery information display area (main area). ) Since the display control displayed at 1151 is performed, the normal effect can be resumed without a sense of incongruity when viewed from the player.

  (18) Probability that the length of the operation time when the second movable piece 81 is operated is high or low in the probability of entering the game ball into the special symbol start port 82, and further, the state where the special game is performed. In consideration of the relationship with the height of the second, in the lottery process for the normal hit, the operation time information indicating different operation times as the operation time of the second movable piece 81 enabling the special symbol start opening 82 to enter the ball A lottery process is performed for multiple types of hits associated with each other. On this basis, when the drive control means (ordinary winning game execution means 607) wins one of the multiple types of winning by the first lottery means, the operation time corresponding to the corresponding winning type Only the drive of the second movable piece (movable member) 81 is controlled so that the special symbol starting port 82 can enter the ball. That is, in this case, the second winning piece 81 can be determined each time only by the fact that the second movable piece 81 is operated for a time corresponding to the winning type. It will be possible to suppress the decline of interest.

  (19) The first display mode determining means (ordinary symbol success / failure determining means 602) includes a normal display determining means for determining a display mode for winning when the plurality of types of hits are lost, and the short hit When the winning is won, the first specific display determining means for determining the display mode for short hits as the specific display mode, and for the long hits as the specific display mode when the long hit is won And a second specific display determining means for determining the display mode of the normal display, the normal display determining means, the first specific display determining means, and the second specific display according to the result of the normal lottery process By selectively using the determining means, the display mode of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 is determined. The normal symbol image display control means (first effect image display control means) 631 determines when the display mode for the defeat is determined and when the display mode for the short hit is determined. The display control of the effect image is performed so that the display modes of the effect images displayed on the second display effect unit are similar to each other. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the winning is the winning or the short win is winning. That is, in this case, when a game ball is inserted into the special symbol start opening 82 that is allowed to enter by winning the short win, according to the result of the lottery process for the special win, as seen from the player A display effect (special effect) comes to be suddenly performed, and thereby it is possible to expect a suitable suppression of a decrease in the interest of the game.

(20) The receiving guide member 535 can receive the game ball at the protruding position, and overflows the game ball received at the protruding position when switching from the protruding position to the accommodation position. It is configured. Therefore, the game balls are prevented from being received by the special symbol starting port 82 more than expected, and the performance of the gaming machine is exhibited as scheduled.
(Second Embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described. Note that the gaming machine of this embodiment is also used based on the entrance of the gaming ball into the special symbol starting port 82 (FIG. 2), almost the same as the gaming machine of the first embodiment (FIG. 3). A lottery process for winning per item (small bonus) and jackpot is performed. Also,
-When winning a small win, the operation of the first movable piece 142 allows the game ball to enter the center accessory 91 (see FIG. 13).
-The game balls that have entered the center role 91 are assigned to the specific area 344 by the compound guidance device 293 and the rotary sorter 294 (FIGS. 24 to 26), and the jackpot is won, When any one of the conditions is satisfied, a jackpot game is performed in which more prize balls are paid out to the player.
The configuration described above and the configurations described in the effects (1) to (20) are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84, game balls are irregularly placed in the pre-lottery passage 411 between the holding device 360 of the rotary sorting device 294 and the rotating body 347. A turbulent flow generation device 412 that allows the flow down is provided. That is, the turbulent flow generating device 412 has a structure in which the game ball falls while rotating through the through-hole 412a in a spiral shape, and the timing at which the game ball reaches the rotating body 347 is shifted through such a turbulent flow function. Like that. That is, in this case, the time required for the game ball flowing down the pre-lottery passage 411 to reach the rotating body 347 is changed by the turbulent flow generation device 412 each time. For this reason, the time from when the game ball enters the center accessory 91 until it reaches the rotating body 347 is irregular, and the player has the highest probability of entering the specific area 344. It becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the special symbol start port 82 aiming at the point. As a result, the mismatch between the preset payout rate and the payout rate that appears at the time of the actual game is preferably improved, and a decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is basically the same as or equivalent to the effects (1) to (20) of the first embodiment. The effect can be obtained and the following effect can be newly obtained.

  (21) A turbulent flow generation device 412 is provided to allow game balls flowing down the pre-lottery passage 411 to flow irregularly in the pre-lottery passage 411. That is, in this case, the time required for the game ball flowing down the pre-lottery passage 411 to reach the rotating body 347 is changed by the turbulent flow generation device 412 each time. For this reason, the time from when the game ball enters the center accessory 91 until it reaches the rotating body 347 is irregular, and the player has the highest probability of entering the specific area 344. It becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the special symbol start port 82 aiming at the point. As a result, the mismatch between the preset payout rate and the payout rate that appears at the time of the actual game is preferably improved, and a decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  For example, the turbulent flow generation device 412 is not limited to the device shown in FIG. 84, and may be any device that allows the game balls flowing down the pre-lottery passage 411 to flow irregularly in the pre-lottery passage 411.

  Even when the operation time information associated with the short time in the operation time information is determined (step S8890), the second movable piece 81 may be operated a plurality of times. In this case, when the short-time information is determined (step S8890), it is possible to further reduce the probability of the game ball entering the special symbol start port 82.

  The number of times when the second movable piece 81 is operated a plurality of times and its driving mode are arbitrary. For example, the opening / closing operation times of the second movable piece in the jobs “1”, “3”, and “5” may be equalized. Further, the closing operation time of the second movable piece 81 in the jobs “2” and “4” may be made equal. Further, the control mode is not necessarily performed according to the schedule of a plurality of jobs.

  In the above embodiment, the registration of the advantageous state flag is canceled in response to the counter value of the continuation period counter becoming “0”, but the present invention is not limited to this. In short, if the driving control of the second movable piece 81 is performed a predetermined number of times and the registration of the advantageous state flag is canceled, the sense of tension for the game is suitably maintained.

  For example, in the above embodiment, among the plurality of internal processes performed by the main control board 765, the lottery processing function for the normal winning, the lottery processing function for the special winning, the holding function, etc.) are functioning properly. The game information display area (main control function diagnosis area) 1152 can be recognized, but other functions (winning determination function, discharge determination function, etc.) are also functioning properly. The display area (main control function diagnosis area) 1152 may be made recognizable. In this case, the inspection of the processing function of the main control board 765 becomes easier.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the receiving guide member 535 is disposed with respect to the special symbol starting port 82, but the receiving guiding member 535 is set with respect to other prize winning ports (for example, the normal symbol starting port 96). You may make it provide. Moreover, although the thing which moves the acceptance guidance member 535 based on the result of a normal lottery was shown, you may make it move based on game states other than a lottery result.

  In the above embodiment, only one special symbol starting port 82 is provided. However, the number is not limited to one, and a plurality of special symbol starting ports 82 may be provided. At this time, a lottery may be performed by determining which of the special symbol start openings has been won. For example, when the first special symbol start opening and the second special symbol start opening are provided, when the first special symbol start opening is won, the lottery is performed by the first lottery means, and the second special symbol start opening When winning at the start opening, it is conceivable to perform lottery by the second lottery means.

  In the above embodiment, the solenoid 548 is shown as a drive source for the receiving guide member 535 and the winning prevention member 561. However, the drive source is not particularly limited, and for example, it is slid using a motor. Also good.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but the gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine, a gaming machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, etc. The invention can be applied.

  In other words, a pachinko machine is a game in which an input medium such as a game ball that is a medium that a player inserts into the game machine and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player are the same. This is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball that has been inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  There are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as “digipachi”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (ie, game state) Detection means), lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the entrance state detection means, and special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. Or “additional effect image display means for displaying a decorative symbol sequence composed of a plurality of decorative symbols and causing characters or the like to appear at a predetermined timing” , Which is generally represented by what is referred to as a “multi-function machine”, comprising a lottery means for performing lottery by distributing game balls in an accessory and lottery means for performing lottery by winning at the start opening. ”, Represented by what is generally called“ Alepatchi ”“ For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 games, and the game balls are placed in a plurality of entrances in one game. In accordance with this, “a payout of a predetermined number of game balls” can be exemplified.

  On the other hand, with a pachislot machine, a medal that is a game medium is inserted, and after inserting the medal, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the operation of the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). It is a slot machine with a stop operation function that performs a substantial game of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the variation of the symbol row satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large amount of medals. In addition, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined is a plurality of (for example, five) game balls that are used as one unit of input medium. ) Is variably displayed in accordance with the operation of), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time when the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. In this case, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, it seems that there is no gaming medium at first glance in a gaming machine that does not play a substantial game depending on the inserted medium, such as a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused However, even with such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that the game content played using a game ball or other appropriate article is included in the entire game content. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be a target of a gaming machine in which a game is played using a gaming medium.

  In addition, the effect display device 115 in the above-described embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to a liquid crystal display device. It may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT. That is, the mode is not limited as long as it is possible to derive the normal hit determination result. However, when deriving the determination result for the normal hit, it is preferable that it is possible to appeal to the player that there is a possibility of winning the normal hit, such as reach display.

  Next, a technical idea that can be grasped from the above embodiment and another example will be added below.

(Technical thought 1)
A game board having a game area and into which a game ball is driven toward the game area;
Opening and closing that is provided in the game area of the game board and that can be opened and closed between a closed state in which it is difficult to receive a game ball driven toward the game area and an open state in which it is easier to receive a game ball than the closed state Equipment,
A first start port provided in the game area;
A second start port provided in the game area, having a movable member, and allowing a game ball to enter only when the movable member opens and closes;
First start determination means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port;
A lottery for winning the first hit that triggers the operation of the movable member based on the fact that the first start determination means determines that a game ball has entered the first start port. A first lottery means for processing;
When the first winning is won in the lottery process by the first lottery means, drive control of the movable member is performed so that a game ball can enter the second start port. Drive control means;
Second start determination means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port which is allowed to enter by drive control by the drive control means according to the first winning winning. When,
Second lottery means for performing lottery processing for winnings and jackpots based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting port by the second start determining means;
An object game executing means for performing a game per object in which the opening and closing device is opened and closed based on the winning of the object being won in the lottery process by the second lottery means;
Whether or not the game balls entered into the special area among the plurality of receiving areas including the special area and the loss area are distributed when a game ball enters the open / closed opening / closing device. A machine lottery device for performing the lottery of
The game balls entered in the opening / closing device are assigned to the special area among the plurality of receiving areas, and the jackpot is won in the lottery process by the second lottery means; A game machine comprising: a second special game execution means for performing a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the game per game when any one of the conditions is satisfied,
The drive control means includes
Advantageous state starting means for registering advantageous game information indicating that the player is in an advantageous state in response to a predetermined specific condition being satisfied;
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous game information is registered in driving control of the movable member;
When it is determined by the advantageous state determination means that the advantageous game information has been registered, the time during which the game ball can enter the second starting port is longer than when the advantageous game information has not been registered. Advantageous control means for controlling the driving of the movable member so that the
Advantageous state ending means for canceling registration of the advantageous game information by the advantageous state starting means in response to the drive control by the advantageous control means being performed a predetermined number of times,
In the lottery process by the second lottery means, one of the bonuses and the jackpot is always won.

In such a configuration, the second starting port is provided so that a game ball can enter only when the drive control of the movable member by the drive control means is performed, and the drive control of the movable member is performed. When it was not performed, it was made impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port. That is, as a necessary condition for the above jackpot game to be performed,
(A) In a lottery process performed based on a game ball entering the first starting port, a first winning point that triggers the operation of the movable member is won.
(B) A game ball is further entered into the second starting port that is allowed to enter when the condition (a) is satisfied.
The logical product condition of the condition (A) and the condition (B) is adopted. In this way, by adopting a structure in which the two lottery processes are performed sequentially (stepwise), the two types of start ports (first start port, second start port, and the like) are viewed from the player side. It is made clear which one of the starting openings) should be operated so that the game ball enters the starting opening.

  However, in a gaming machine that employs such a staged game, in order to perform the lottery process by the second lottery means that can win the jackpot, first, a game ball is placed at the first starting port. You have to enter the ball. Next, the first win must be won in a lottery process according to this entry in which a big win cannot be won. Accordingly, the second lottery is performed during a predetermined period in which the movable member is driven and controlled in accordance with the winning in spite of winning the first winning in the first lottery process in which the big winning cannot be won. If a game ball does not enter the starting port, there is a concern that the interest of the game will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, during the period in which the advantageous game information is registered (during the so-called short time state), the game ball can enter the second starting port more than when the advantageous game information is not registered. By controlling the driving of the movable member so that the time to be played becomes longer, the probability of entering the second starting port when winning the first hit is increased, thereby playing the game I am trying to maintain my interests.

  By the way, the mechanical lottery apparatus for performing the above-mentioned distribution lottery usually has a guide part for guiding the game ball to the special area, and this guide part is operated in advance such as sliding or rotating in the opening / closing device. In many cases, it has a structure that is displaced regularly (periodically) with a mode. For this reason, especially when the time during which the game ball can enter the second starting port is long, the player places the game ball in the position of the guide unit for guiding the game ball to the special area and in the opening / closing device. By adjusting the timing at which the game ball enters the second starting port, the probability of entering the game ball into the special area, and thus the jackpot game is The probability of being done can be greatly increased. For example, if the time (timing) at which the game ball can enter the second start port is poor with respect to the position of the guide unit that guides the game ball to the special area, the player By trying not to enter the game ball into the starting port of the game and aim for the next opportunity, the above-mentioned time-short state is continued. According to such a playing technique, since the probability that the jackpot game is played is greatly increased, the short-time state advantageous to the player is continuously maintained. It is assumed that it will disappear.

  In this regard, in the above configuration, if the movable member is performed a predetermined number of times during the period in which the advantageous game information is registered (so-called short-time state), the registration of the advantageous game information is canceled. By doing so, such a short time state is ended (advantageous state end means). That is, in this case, when the movable member is operated a predetermined number of times, the so-called time-saving state is forcibly terminated regardless of the number of lottery processes executed according to the game ball entering the second starting port. Become so. Therefore, the player inserts the game ball into the second starting port based on the relationship between the position of the guide unit that guides the game ball to the special area and the timing at which the game ball enters the opening / closing device. It becomes difficult to adjust the timing to make the ball. That is, even during such a short time state, the game must be played so that the game ball enters the second starting port, and a sense of tension with respect to the game is suitably maintained.

  However, when the movable member is operated a predetermined number of times, in a gaming machine in which the so-called time-saving state is forcibly terminated, the player may not be able to enjoy the benefits of the so-called time-saving state. May fall. Therefore, in the above configuration, when even one game ball enters the second starting port, a lottery process is performed in which either the winning combination or the big winning combination is always won. The interest of this will also be suitably maintained.

(Technical thought 2)
The advantageous state ending means comprises:
When the predetermined specific condition is satisfied when the advantageous game information is registered, drive control by the advantageous control means is performed a number of times longer than the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, further comprising advantageous state extending means for canceling registration of the advantageous game information by the advantageous state starting means.

  Thus, in a gaming machine in which the short-time state continues for a longer period, the player is given more chances to adjust the above-mentioned entrance timing. Therefore, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 is particularly effective when applied to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2. In other words, a sense of tension in the game can be suitably maintained while suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Technical thought 3)
The drive control means performs drive control of the movable member at a plurality of times different from each other as a time during which a game ball can enter the second starting port.
The advantageous control means is more advantageous than an average time in which a game ball can enter the second starting port by driving control of the movable member when the advantageous game information is not registered. The drive control of the movable member is performed such that the average time during which the game ball can enter the second starting port is longer by the drive control of the movable member when information is registered. The gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2.

  In the above configuration, the time during which the game ball can enter the second starting port is different, and the player aims at the timing at which the probability of entering the special area is the highest. It becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the starting port 2.

(Technical thought 4)
The first lottery means temporarily places the lottery process in a suspended state in performing the lottery process related to the first winning.
The drive control means, when the first winning is won in the lottery process by the first lottery means performed by releasing the hold state, the game to the second start opening The gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein drive control of the movable member is performed so that a ball can enter.

(Technical thought 5)
The mechanical lottery device includes a guide unit that guides a game ball entered in the opening / closing device to the special area, and the guide unit is periodically operated in a predetermined operation mode in the opening / closing device. The gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein the distribution lottery is performed by displacing the game machine.

  As described above, in the machine lottery apparatus having such a guide unit, the player can determine the relationship between the position of the guide unit that guides the game ball to the special area and the timing at which the game ball enters the opening / closing device. Therefore, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second starting port aiming at the timing when the probability of entering the special area is the highest. Therefore, the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4 is particularly effective when applied to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5.

(Technical thought 6)
A game board having a game area and into which a game ball is driven toward the game area;
Opening and closing that is provided in the game area of the game board and that can be opened and closed between a closed state in which it is difficult to receive a game ball driven toward the game area and an open state in which it is easier to receive a game ball than the closed state Equipment,
A first start port provided in the game area;
A second start port provided in the game area, having a movable member, and allowing a game ball to enter only when the movable member opens and closes;
First start determination means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port;
A lottery for winning the first hit that triggers the operation of the movable member based on the fact that the first start determination means determines that a game ball has entered the first start port. A first lottery means for processing;
When the first winning is won in the lottery process by the first lottery means, the movable ball is allowed to enter the second starting port only for a first predetermined time. Drive control means for controlling the drive of the member;
Second start determination means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port which is allowed to enter by drive control by the drive control means according to the first winning winning. When,
Based on the fact that the second start determining means determines that a game ball has entered the second start port, a lottery process is performed in which either a winning combination or a big win is always won. Two lottery means;
An object game executing means for performing a game per object in which the opening and closing device is opened and closed based on the winning of the object being won in the lottery process by the second lottery means;
Whether or not the game balls entered into the special area among the plurality of receiving areas including the special area and the loss area are distributed when a game ball enters the open / closed opening / closing device. A machine lottery device for performing the lottery of
The game balls entered in the opening / closing device are assigned to the special area among the plurality of receiving areas, and the jackpot is won in the lottery process by the second lottery means; A game machine comprising: a second special game execution means for performing a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the game per game when any one of the conditions is satisfied,
The drive control means includes
Advantageous state storage means for storing advantageous game information indicating that the player is in an advantageous state in response to a predetermined condition being satisfied;
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous game information is stored in driving control of the movable member;
When it is determined by the advantageous state determination means that the advantageous game information is stored, the time during which the game ball can enter the second starting port is longer than when the advantageous game information is not stored. Advantageous control means for controlling the driving of the movable member so that the
An advantageous state ending means for deleting the advantageous game information from the advantageous state storage means in response to the drive control by the advantageous control means being performed a predetermined number of times.

  Note that the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 6 can be appropriately combined with any one of the gaming machines described in the technical ideas 7 to 16 below.

(Technical thought 7)
A game board having a game area and into which a game ball is driven toward the game area;
A plurality of processes related to the progress of the game are sequentially performed, including a determination process as to whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a ball game in which a game ball driven toward the game area flows down in the game area. A main control means to perform;
Sub-control means for performing control related to various effects according to the result of the determination process by the main control means,
The main control means is a gaming machine that performs a special game advantageous to a player when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball game,
An opening / closing device that is provided in a game area of the game board and can be opened and closed between a closed state in which it is difficult to receive a game ball and an open state in which it is easier to receive a game ball than the closed state;
A first start port provided in the game area;
A second start port provided in the gaming area, having a movable member, and allowing a game ball to enter only when the movable member operates;
A game information display device for dynamically displaying the first game information and the second game information;
An effect image display device arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area and displaying a predetermined effect image;
The effect image display device
It is provided as a part of the display area of the effect image display device, and is capable of recognizing that each of a plurality of internal processes relating to the progress of the game sequentially executed by the main control unit functions properly. A control function diagnosis area, and an expectation degree expression area for expressing an expectation degree that the special game will be performed, in a form that occupies most of the display area of the effect image display device; And
The main control means includes
A first start determining means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first start opening; and a game ball entering the first start opening by the first start determining means. Based on the determination that there has been a lottery, a lottery process for winning the first hit that triggers the operation of the movable member is performed, and at the time of the lottery process, the lottery process is temporarily held. When the first winning is won in the lottery process by the first lottery means and the first lottery means performed by releasing the holding state, the movable member has a predetermined operating time. Drive control means for performing drive control of the movable member so as to operate only, and the second that is allowed to enter by the drive control by the drive control means based on the entrance of the game ball to the first start port. Games at the start of A second start determining means for determining whether or not there has been an incoming ball; and based on the fact that the second start determining means determines that a game ball has entered the second start opening And a second lottery means for performing a lottery process for the second win, and the opening / closing device is opened and closed based on the fact that the second win is won in the lottery process by the second lottery means. Special game execution means for performing a special game, winning determination means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the opening / closing device, and winning ball entering the opening / closing device by the winning determination means When it is determined that there is a payout control unit that performs payout control for paying out the game ball, and when the lottery process is performed by the first lottery unit, the result of the lottery process is the game information display device. No. displayed in First display mode determining means for determining a display mode for the first game information in a manner reflected in the display mode of one game information, and the display mode is determined by the first display mode determining unit. When the first game information is dynamically displayed on the game information display device so that the first game information corresponding to the determined display mode appears on the game information display device, display control is performed for the first game information. When the lottery process is performed by the first display control means and the second lottery means, the result of the lottery process is reflected in the display mode of the second game information displayed on the game information display device. A second display mode determining means for determining a display mode for the second game information in a form, and when the display mode is determined by the second display mode determining unit, according to the determined display mode Second display control is performed for the second game information that is dynamically displayed on the game information display device so that the second game information appears on the game information display device independently of the first game information. Display control means, and
The sub-control means is
A first indicating that various processes performed by the main control means are functioning properly in response to a game ball entering the first starting port among a plurality of processes related to the progress of the game. And various processes performed by the main control unit in accordance with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port among the plurality of processes related to the progress of the game are functioning properly. Second appropriate information indicating the effect, first effect information indicating the display mode determined by the first display mode determining means, and first display mode determined by the second display mode determining means And the second acquisition information from the main control means, and based on the fact that the first appropriate information is acquired by the information acquisition means, the game ball to the first start port Various types performed by the main control means in response to entering a ball The first image control means for outputting an image to the main control function diagnosis area that the process is functioning properly, and the second appropriate information is acquired by the information acquisition means, Independent of the image output by the first image control means, that the various processes performed by the main control means are functioning properly in response to the game balls entering the second starting port. Second image control means for outputting an image to the main control function diagnosis area so as to appear, and the acquired first effect information based on the fact that the first effect information is acquired by the information acquisition means A third image control means for performing display control for the effect image displayed in the expectation level expression area so that only the effect image corresponding to the display mode indicated by By Based on the acquisition of the second effect information, the expectation level expression area so that only the effect image according to the display mode indicated by the acquired second effect information appears in the expectation level expression area. 4th image control means which performs display control about the production image displayed on,
The fourth image control means includes:
When the second presentation information is acquired, the third image control is performed until a series of display controls started in the expectation level expression area according to the acquired second presentation information. Prohibiting means for prohibiting display control on the expectation expression area by means, and by the prohibiting by the prohibiting means, the display control by the fourth image control means is stepped from the display control by the third image control means. The gaming machine is characterized by expressing that the degree of expectation that the special game will be performed is increased.

In the above configuration, the first start port and the second start port are provided as the start ports, and the second start port among the start ports is
-A game ball enters the first starting port.
Was the entry condition. Then, based on the fact that the second winning is won in the lottery process by the second lottery means performed based on the fact that a game ball is further entered into the second starting port which can be entered in this way. Thus, a special game in which the opening / closing device is opened is performed. In such a configuration, the expectation that a special game will be performed is greater when the ball enters the second start port than when the ball enters the first start port, and a special game occurs. The monotonicity of the process up to this is preferably eliminated.

  On the other hand, with respect to the effect image display device, after adopting such a configuration, the effect image display device is provided as a part of the display area of the effect image display device, and a plurality of the progress of the game sequentially executed by the main control means. The main control function diagnosis area where it can be recognized that the internal processes are functioning properly and the display area of the effect image display device occupy most of the area, and the special game is performed. It has an expectation level expression area for expressing the expectation level. That is, in this case, among the plurality of internal processes by the main control means, here, in particular, various kinds of processes performed by the main control means according to the game balls entering the first start port and the second start port. That the internal processing (for example, the lottery processing function for the first win, the lottery processing function for the second win, the hold function, etc.) is functioning properly is the first image control means and the first It becomes possible to recognize each through display control by the second image control means, and thereby it is possible to easily inspect the appropriateness of the processing function in the main control means. In particular, since the function by the main control means is diagnosed by the monitoring function by the sub control means different from the main control means, the reliability of the inspection is also compared with the case of self-monitoring. It will be maintained at a high level.

On the other hand, the expectation level expression area is provided as an area for expressing the expectation level that the special game that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display of the monotonous lottery result by the game information display device will be performed. Yes. That is, in this expectation level expression area, first, display control by the third image control means (normal display effect (normal effect performed in the expectation expression area when entering the first start opening) is performed. )) And display control by the fourth image control means (a display effect with a high degree of expectation that a special game will be performed rather than the normal display effect performed when entering the second starting opening) (Special effect)) only the effect image corresponding to one of the display controls is selectively displayed, which is sufficient as the above-mentioned expectation expression area as the output destination of the main effect image Space is reserved. Then, when the second effect information is acquired, the fourth image control means starts a series of operations that are started in the expectation level expression area according to the acquired second effect information. Until the display control is completed, a prohibiting unit for prohibiting the display control on the expectation expression area by the third image control unit is provided. That is, by the prohibition by the prohibition means, the display control by the fourth image control means is performed step by step from the display control by the third image control means, so that the expectation that the special game will be performed is increased. I decided to express that it was higher. In other words, in this case, the special effect is performed as if developed from the normal effect, and the display effect based on such another lottery result can be continuously performed without a sense of incongruity when viewed from the player. become. Moreover, the main control means is configured to digest the normal effect internally each time during the period in which the special effect is performed by the sub control means (first lottery means, drive control). Means, first display mode determination means). Therefore, even when a long display effect is executed in the second display effect unit, it is possible to improve the rotation efficiency, which is the time until the next lottery result is obtained.
(Technical thought 8)
The information acquisition means is provided for display control by the third image control means regardless of whether display control to the expectation expression area by the third image control means is prohibited by the prohibition means. The first presentation information and the first appropriate information provided for image output by the first image control means are always obtained simultaneously,
The third image control means includes:
When the first effect information is acquired at the same time as the first appropriate information by the information acquisition means, it is determined whether or not display control by the third image control means is prohibited by the prohibition means. In accordance with the display mode indicated by the first effect information acquired by the information acquisition means, provided that the prohibition determination means includes a determination that the display control is not prohibited by the prohibition determination means. The gaming machine according to the technical idea 7, wherein display control is performed on the effect image displayed in the expectation level expression area so that only the effect image appears in the expectation level expression area.

However, as in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 7, when the display control by the first to fourth image control means is performed in the effect image display device, the first to fourth image control means. In accordance with the timing at which each display control is performed, it is necessary to separately acquire the first and second effect information and the first and second appropriate information, and the processing for the acquisition becomes complicated. In this regard, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 8, the information acquisition unit determines whether display control to the expectation level expression area by the third image control unit is prohibited by the prohibition unit. First, the first effect information used for display control by the third image control unit and the first appropriate information used for image output by the first image control unit are always acquired simultaneously. It was decided. Then, when the third image control means acquires the first effect information at the same time as the first appropriate information by the information acquisition means, the third image control means by the prohibition means. Obtained by the information acquisition means provided that the prohibition judging means judges that the display control is not prohibited by the prohibition judging means. Display control is performed on the effect image displayed in the expectation level expression area so that only the effect image corresponding to the display mode indicated by the first effect information appears in the expectation level expression area. In such a configuration, the first effect information used for display control by the third image control means having different execution timings for the display control and the image output by the first image control means are used. The two display controls can be appropriately performed while always obtaining the first appropriate information.
(Technical thought 9)
The main control means includes
A first command transmission unit configured to transmit a first command indicating the determined display mode to the sub-control unit when the display mode is determined by the first display mode determination unit; and When the display mode is determined by the display mode determination unit, the second command transmission unit transmits a second command indicating the determined display mode to the sub-control unit.
The information acquisition means acquires the first effect information and the first appropriate information as the first command transmitted from the main control means, and the second effect information and the second effect information. The gaming machine according to the technical idea 8, wherein the appropriate information is acquired as the second command transmitted from the main control means.

  In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 8, the first effect information used for display control by the third image control unit and the image output by the first image control unit are used. By always acquiring the first appropriate information at the same time, the processing related to the acquisition is certainly simplified. However, it is still necessary for the main control means to transmit a command instructing the content of the display for the type of display control performed by the sub-control means, increasing the processing load on the main control means, and the main control. The increase in communication load between the means and the sub-control means and the compression of the storage capacity in the main control means cannot be ignored. In this regard, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 8, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 9, when the display mode is determined by the first display mode determining unit, the main control unit is When the display mode is determined by the first command transmission unit that transmits the first command indicating the determined display mode to the sub-control unit, and the second display mode determination unit, the determined display The second command transmitting means for transmitting the second command indicating the aspect to the sub-control means is provided. Then, the information acquisition means acquires the first effect information and the first appropriate information as the first command transmitted from the main control means, and the second effect information. And the second appropriate information are acquired as the second command transmitted from the main control means.

  That is, when the first command indicating the display mode (winning information, variation time, etc.) determined by the first display mode determination unit is received by the sub-control unit, the main control unit This means that the determination function of the first start determination means, the lottery function and holding function of the first lottery means, the determination function of the first display mode determination means, and the like functioned properly. To do. Therefore, the first image control means performs the main image in response to the game ball entering the first start port based on the information (first appropriate information) obtained from the first command. It is possible to output to the main control function diagnosis area that various internal processes performed by the control means are functioning properly, whereby the first appropriate information, the first effect information, Can be transmitted and received with one command.

  The same applies to the second command. When the second command indicating the display mode (such as winning information) determined by the second display mode determining unit is received by the sub-control unit. The main control means includes a determination function of the second start determination means, a lottery function and a hold function of the second lottery means, a determination function of the second display mode determination means, and the like. Means that it worked properly. Accordingly, the second image control means performs the main image in response to the game ball entering the second start port based on the information (second appropriate information) obtained from the second command. It is possible to output an image to the main control function diagnosis area that various internal processes performed by the control means are functioning properly, whereby the second appropriate information, the second effect information, Can be transmitted and received with one command.

As a result, the above-mentioned problems such as an increase in processing load on the main control means, an increase in communication load between the main control means and the sub control means, and compression of storage capacity in the main control means are suitable. Can be solved.
(Technical thought 10)
The third image control means modifies the information indicated by the first command acquired by the information acquisition means when the prohibition determination means determines that the display control is prohibited. And when the information indicated by the first command is modified by the modifying means, the display control according to the first command is stopped based on the modified information. The gaming machine described in 1.

  In such a configuration, a modification unit that modifies the information indicated by the first command acquired by the information acquisition unit is provided, and the first command is received based on the information modified by the modification unit. Since the display control is stopped, the stepwise display can be performed more appropriately.

(Technical thought 11)
The second lottery means temporarily places the lottery process on hold in the lottery process,
In the special game executing means, the opening / closing device is opened and closed based on the fact that the second winning is won in the lottery process by the second lottery means performed by releasing the holding state. The gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 7 to 10 for performing a special game.

  In the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 7 to 10, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 11, the second lottery means temporarily holds the lottery process in the lottery process. It was decided to be in a state. The special game executing means opens and closes the opening / closing device based on the fact that the second winning is won in the lottery process by the second lottery means performed by releasing the holding state. It was decided to play a special game that was operated. By using such a holding function, it is possible to continuously perform a special effect with high expectation that a special game will be performed.

(Technical thought 12)
The third image control means includes:
When the first effect information is acquired by the information acquisition means, display control is performed on the effect image displayed in the expectation expression area according to the display mode indicated by the acquired first effect information. Timer means for timing the scheduled time to be performed;
Timer operation determining means for determining whether or not the timer means is operating at the end of a series of display controls performed in response to the acquisition of the second effect information by the information acquiring means;
When the timer operation determining unit determines that the timer unit is operating, a display about the effect image displayed in the expectation expression area so that a high-speed display mode in which a predetermined effect image is rapidly changed appears. High-speed fluctuation output means for performing control,
In the display control by the high-speed fluctuation output means,
Display control in which the high-speed display mode is displayed in the expectation expression area until the time of the scheduled time is up by the timer means;
A stop display mode among the display modes initially determined by the first display mode determination unit is displayed in the expectation level expression area in accordance with the timing at which the time measurement of the scheduled time by the timer unit is timed up. The gaming machine according to the technical idea 11, wherein display control is performed.

  By the way, in a gaming machine in which display control (normal effect) to the expectation level expression area by the third image control means is prohibited during the period during which the special effect is performed, display control by the fourth image control means. When the (special effect) ends, the display control (normal effect) on the expectation expression area by the third image control means is resumed. However, at this time, depending on the timing when the normal effect is resumed, the display mode determined by the first display mode determining means may be displayed in the expectation level expression area from the middle of the effect. It might be.

  In this regard, in the above configuration, when the display control by the fourth image control unit ends, it is determined whether or not the timer unit is operating. When it is determined that the timer means is in operation, the high-speed display mode in which the effect image according to the result of the first lottery process is fluctuated at high speed corresponds to the result of the second lottery process. By performing display control on the effect image displayed in the expectation level expression area so as to appear in the expectation level expression area in place of the display mode, the third image control means moves to the expectation level expression area. Display control (normal production) was resumed. More specifically, the display control in which the high-speed display mode is displayed in the expectation expression area until the time measurement of the scheduled time by the timer means is up, and the time measurement of the scheduled time by the timer means is time. Since the stop display mode among the display modes initially determined by the first display mode determination means is performed in accordance with the timing to be uploaded, the display control is performed so as to be displayed in the expectation level expression area. Therefore, the normal performance can be resumed without any sense of incongruity.

(Technical thought 13)
In the lottery process by the first lottery means, a plurality of types of hits each associated with operation time information indicating different operation times as the operation time of the movable member allowing the second start port to enter the ball. The lottery process of
The drive control means is configured such that when any one of the plurality of types of winning is won by the first lottery means, the second starting port can enter the ball for an operation time corresponding to the corresponding winning type. The gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 7 to 12, wherein drive control of the movable member is performed as described above.

  In the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 7 to 12, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 13, the length of the operation time when the movable member operates is limited to the second starting port. In view of the relationship between the probability of entering a game ball and the probability of winning the second hit, the lottery process by the first lottery means that the second start opening can be entered. The lottery process is performed for a plurality of types of hits each associated with operation time information indicating different operation times as the operation time of the movable member. And then, when the drive control means wins any one of the multiple types of hits by the first lottery means, the second start port is operated for the operation time corresponding to the corresponding type of hit. The drive control of the movable member is performed so that a ball can be entered. In other words, in this case, the winning probability for the second winning can be determined each time just by moving the movable member for a time corresponding to the winning type, thereby reducing the interest of the game. Can be suppressed.

(Technical thought 14)
The first lottery means that a short hit is associated with a short operation time in the operation time information, and a long win is associated with a long operation time in the operation time information. The gaming machine according to the technical idea 13, wherein the lottery process is performed in such a manner that the short win is won more frequently than the long win.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 13, as in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 14, the first lottery means is associated with a short operation time in the operation time information. When the win is short and the hit associated with the long operation time in the operation time information is the long win, the lottery process is performed in such a manner that the short win is won more frequently than the long win. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably increase the frequency at which the game ball can enter the second starting port (frequency of chances that the second hit can be won), thereby reducing the interest of the game. Can be suppressed.

(Technical thought 15)
The short hit is a hit associated with operation time information indicating a minimum operation time as a time required for a game ball to enter the second start opening, and the long hit is the The gaming machine according to the technical idea 14, wherein the operation time information indicating an operation time sufficient as a time required for the game ball to enter the second start opening is associated with the operation time information.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 14, as in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 15, it is necessary for the gaming ball to enter the second starting port with the short hit. The operation time information indicating the minimum operation time as the time is assumed to be associated, and the operation time sufficient as the time required for the game ball to enter the second start port is set as the operation time information. It is practically desirable to make the hits associated with the operation time information shown. That is, in this case, by adopting such a short hit, the frequency at which the game ball can enter the second starting port (frequency of chances that the second hit can be won) is maximized. Will be able to. In addition, when the long win is won, it is almost determined that the special effect is performed. Furthermore, it is possible to extend the operation time for the short hit by using a so-called time reduction function. In this case, usually, only the special effect is repeatedly performed on the predetermined display unit.

(Technical thought 16)
The first display mode determining means includes
A normal display determining means for determining a display mode for the winning selection when the first lottery means is lost.
A first specific display determining means for determining a display mode for short winning when the short winning is won by the first lottery means;
And a second specific display determining means for determining a display mode for long winning when the long winning is won by the first lottery means, according to the result of the lottery processing by the first lottery means By selectively using the normal display determining means, the first specific display determining means, and the second specific display determining means, the first game information and the second game information displayed on the game information display device The display mode for game information is determined,
The third image control means displays in the expectation level expression area of the effect image display device when the display mode for the loss selection is determined and when the display mode for the short hit is determined. The gaming machine according to the technical idea 15, wherein display control for the effect image is performed so that display modes of the effect image to be displayed are approximate to each other.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 15, as in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 16, the first display mode determining means is defeated by the first lottery means. And a first specific display determination for determining the display mode for short winning when the short winning is won by the first lottery means and the normal display determining unit for determining the display mode for the loss selection. And a second specific display determining means for determining a display mode for long winning when the long winning is won by the first lottery means, the lottery processing of the first lottery means By selectively using the normal display determining means, the first specific display determining means, and the second specific display determining means according to the result, the first game information displayed on the game information display device and Second game When the display mode for the information is determined, the third image control means determines whether the display mode for the loss selection is determined and when the display mode for the short hit is determined. If display control is performed for the effect image so that the display modes of the effect image displayed in the expectation level expression area of the image display device are similar to each other, the player can determine whether the player has lost the game or the short hit. It will be difficult to judge whether is won. In other words, in this case, when a game ball is inserted into the second starting opening that is allowed to enter by winning the short win, the player determines that the result of the lottery process by the second lottery means is as seen from the player. A corresponding display effect (special effect) comes to be suddenly performed, and thereby it is possible to expect a suitable suppression of a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Technical thought 17)
In the direction from the second starting port toward the back side of the game board, a specific starting receiving passage serving as a passage for a game ball received from the second starting port is formed,
The movable member is
It is displaceable between an accommodation position accommodated in the specific start receiving passage and a projecting position projecting toward the player side from the board surface of the game board, and when in the projecting position, The game ball that is driven toward the game area can be received, and the received game ball can be guided to the specific start receiving passage, and the game ball that is received when switching from the protruding position to the storage position is received. Overflowing receiving guide member,
And a narrow position where the opening area of the second start port is made smaller, and a larger position than when the inside area of the specific start receiving passage is closer to the narrow start position and the opening area of the specific start port is in the narrow position. When the vehicle is in the narrow position, the game ball cannot be received in the specific start port. Receiving prevention member that can accept the game ball of,
A gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 16.
The receiving guide member is configured to receive the game ball at the protruding position and overflow the game ball received at the protruding position when switching from the protruding position to the receiving position. Yes. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from being received by the second starting port more than expected, and the performance of the gaming machine is exhibited as scheduled.

The perspective view which shows the state by which the front frame was opened about 1st Embodiment of the gaming machine concerning this invention. The front view of the gaming machine of the embodiment. The front view which expands and shows the game area | region of the gaming machine of the embodiment. The perspective view which isolate | separates and shows the main body frame and game board of the game machine of the embodiment. It is a rear view which shows the whole rear side of the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the whole rear side of the gaming machine of the embodiment. The perspective view which shows the state which removed the back cover, various control boards, etc. from the gaming machine shown in FIG. The perspective view which shows the state by which various members were assembled | attached to the main body frame of the gaming machine of the embodiment. The perspective view which shows the main body frame of the game machine of the embodiment. The perspective view which shows the game board with which the various control board box of the game machine of the embodiment was mounted | worn. The perspective view which shows the game area | region of the gaming machine of the embodiment. The perspective view which shows the game area | region of the gaming machine of the embodiment. The front view which shows the center combination of the gaming machine of the same embodiment. The perspective view which shows the state which isolate | separated the front unit and the rear unit of the center combination of the gaming machine of the embodiment. The perspective view which shows a mode that the structural member of the front unit was decomposed | disassembled. The perspective view which shows a mode that the structural member of the rear unit was decomposed | disassembled. The perspective view which shows the opening / closing member drive mechanism of a movable piece from upper left rear. The rear view which shows an opening-and-closing member drive mechanism. The perspective view which shows the state which isolate | separated each structure of the opening-and-closing member drive mechanism from the upper left back. The perspective view which expands and shows a guidance channel | path from the upper right front. The top view which shows a guidance channel | path and a decoration. Sectional drawing which shows the AA cross section and BB cross section in FIG. Sectional drawing which shows the cross section of the discharge opening vicinity of a guide passage. The perspective view which shows a composite induction | guidance | derivation apparatus and a rotary distribution apparatus from the upper right front. The front view which shows a compound guide apparatus and a rotary distribution apparatus. Sectional drawing which shows CC cross section in FIG. Sectional drawing which shows the structure of the distribution device vicinity. Sectional drawing which shows the DD cross section in FIG. Sectional drawing which shows the EE cross section in FIG. The top view which shows a rotary distribution device. The top view which shows the state which removed the rotary body from FIG. Sectional drawing which shows the FF cross section in FIG. Sectional drawing which shows the GG cross section in FIG. The perspective view which shows a meter display apparatus from the upper right back. The perspective view which shows a meter display apparatus from the upper right front. The front view which shows the special start port unit of the embodiment. The perspective view which shows the special start port unit of the embodiment. The perspective view which shows the internal structure of the special start port unit of the embodiment. The cut perspective view which shows the cross-section of the special starting port unit of the embodiment. The perspective view which shows the special start port unit of the embodiment. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine of the embodiment. The functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of a main board | substrate and a peripheral board | substrate. The flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 43; The flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. The flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball command and a self-check command transmission process. The flowchart which shows an example of an ACK signal input determination process. The flowchart which shows an example of a 1st game process. The flowchart which shows an example of a 1st start detection process. The flowchart which shows an example of a 1st lottery / change start process. The flowchart which shows an example of a 1st lottery fluctuation display pattern setting process. The flowchart which shows an example of the process during 1st fluctuation | variation. The flowchart which shows an example of a 1st winning thing action | operation process. The figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table of a normal symbol. The flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd game process. The flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd start detection process. The flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd lottery / change start process. The flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd lottery fluctuation display pattern setting process. The flowchart which shows an example of the process during 2nd fluctuation | variation. The flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd small hits thing action | operation process. The flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd jackpot opening process. The flowchart which shows an example of a special electric utility big hit control process. The figure which shows an example of the variation pattern table of a special symbol. The flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control side. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control side power-on processing of FIG. 64; FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control side power-on process following FIG. 65. FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the payout control side timer interruption process. The flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. The flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for renting a ball. The flowchart which shows an example of a stock monitoring process. The flowchart which shows an example of a payout ball removal determination setting process. The flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. The flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal setting process. An award ball number information table showing an example of a payout command. A table showing an example of a status command. The table which shows an example of the shaping state command which shaped the state command. The functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of the sub integration board | substrate which comprises a peripheral board | substrate. The time chart about presentation display control by a main control board, a sub integration board, and a liquid crystal control board. The figure for demonstrating the display area displayed on the effect display apparatus 115. FIG. The figure which shows the production | presentation concerning a 1st lottery means. The figure which shows the production | presentation concerning a 1st lottery means. The figure which shows the production | presentation concerning a 2nd lottery means. The figure which shows the production | presentation concerning a lottery drawing. The top view which shows the turbulent flow production | generation apparatus used in 2nd Embodiment of the game machine concerning this invention.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 1a Prepaid card unit 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Front frame 5 Game board 6 Lower receiving plate 7 Hinge mechanism 11 Front frame body 12 Game board mounting frame 13 Mechanism mounting body 14 Outer frame side hinge tool 15 Main body frame side hinge Tool 16 Speaker box portion 17 Speaker mounting plate 18 Speaker 19 Launch rail 30 Lower front plate 31 Lower plate 32 Operation handle 33 Ashtray 34 Ball discharge lever 36 Hinge mechanism 37 Game area 38 Open window 39 Window frame 46 Lamp drive board 50 Transparent plate 51 Upper plate 52 Side decoration device 53 Acoustic decoration device 54 Side decoration body 55 Lens 56 Transparent cover body 57 Speaker 58 Speaker cover 63 Sub-integrated board 65 Main control board 70 Locking device 71 Closing tool 72 Body frame locking hook 73 Closing tool 74 Door Locking hook 75 Cylinder lock 76 Outer 77 Inner rail 78 Guide rail 78a Launch port 79 Front component member 81 Second movable piece 82 Special symbol starting port 83 Lower side large winning port 88 Ball outlet 91 Center symbol 96 Normal symbol starting port 98 Attacker device 99 Opening and closing member 101 Count switch 102 Rotation angle switch 107 Full switch 108 Discharge relay board 115 Production display device 116 Display device control board 117 Display device control board box 118 Box mounting base 119 Sub control board 120 Front unit 121 Rear unit 123 Guide wall 124 Opening 125 decoration frame 127 upper side illumination body 128 lower side illumination body 129 frame illumination body 130 sub-control board box 132 main control board box 133 tank attachment part 134 rail attachment part 135 dispensing apparatus attachment part 136 ball tank 137 bottom plate part 1 8 Discharge port 139 Rail component 140 Expansion opening 141 Large prize opening 142 First movable piece 143 Guide passage 144 Inlet 145 Prize guide part 148 Head lamp part 149 Side lamp part 150 Tank rail 151 Front wall part 152 Rear wall part 155 Rail shelf 156 Rectifier 157 Shaft 158 Rail receiver 160 Lamp support 164 Dial 170 Ball dispenser 172 Discharge motor 173 Opening 183 Substrate 184 Opening / closing member drive mechanism 185 Support shaft 186 Plunger 187 Solenoid 188 Reciprocating member 189 Outlet 192 Firing motor 193 Mounting board 194 Launching device 195 Power board 196 Power board box 198 Discharge control board box 200 Rotating shaft 201 Arm section 202 Motion conversion member 203 Rotating transmission member 204 Link Structure 205 Long hole 206 Connecting pin 208 Through hole 209 First case 210 Rear cover body 211 Cover hinge mechanism 212 Rear wall part 213 Peripheral wall part 213a Wall part 213b Wall part 213C Upper side wall part 214 Hinge body 215 Hinge pin 216 Hinge body 217 Elastic closure Body 218 Inspection connector 220 First bearing portion 221 Second bearing portion 222 Mounting portion 223 Guide portion 223a Support portion 224 Second case 225 Flange 226 Harness latch piece 230 Heat radiation hole 231 Heat radiation hole 232 Heat radiation hole 233 Heat radiation hole 235 Sealing portion 237 Code holder 238 Power distribution board 239 Board connector 246 Decoration 247 Crossing guide member 248 Speed reduction member 252 Interface board 253 Ball derivative for lower plate 254 Board box 255 Upper limit 260 Rear guide part 26 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Lowering guide part 262 Front guide part 263 Winning state detection means 264 Shielding cover 280 Circumferential surface guide part 281 Inner direction guide part 282 Each direction conversion part 282 Direction conversion part 283 Projection 284 Back direction guide part 285 Discharge port 286 Projection part 288 Step 291 Opening 292 Rear frame 293 Compound guidance device 294 Rotary sorter 295 Rolling device 296 Guide device 296a Path forming member 297 Meter display device 298 Partition plate 300 Back plate 301 Side plate 302 Decorative object body 303 Decorative object motor 304 Background decoration plate 306 Cylindrical member 307 First region 308 Inner guide passage 309 Second region 313 Discharge sensor 317 Second start port sensor 318 First start port sensor 319 Count sensor 320 Outer guide passage 321 Sorting device 322 Special reserve ball run 323 Average Hold bulb lamp 325 projections 326 Kroon
327 Outflow port 328 Outflow port 329 Extension outflow path 330 Prize winning port sensor 331 V winning prize sensor 332 Special symbol display 333 Normal symbol display 334 Normal accessory driving mechanism 335 Large winning opening opening / closing mechanism 336 Sorting device driving mechanism 338 Holding drive Mechanism 339 Attacker drive mechanism 340 Outlet 341 Inflow passage 341a Inflow passage 342 Inflow passage 342a Inflow port 343 Rotating body drive means 344 Specific region 345 Normal region 346 Return region 347 Rotating body 349 Guide passage 360 Holding device 363 Swing piece 365 Solenoid 36 Crank mechanism 367 Inflow port 369 Guide passage 371 External terminal plate 372 Firing control board 380 Decoration partition plate 381 Electric decoration part 382 Case 384 Rotating body case 384a Rotating body accommodating part 385 Outer peripheral wall 387 Second outflow port 388 One outlet 389 Return outlet 394 Decoration lamp 395 Performance lamp 396 Prize ball lamp 397 Gradation lamp 400 Return passage 405 Rotating shaft 406 Ball housing portion 407 Discharge passage 408 Outflow prevention wall 409 Speed switching means 410 Discharge portion 411 Pre-lottery passage 412 Disturbance Flow generating device 421 Entry restriction wall 422 Motor 423 Transmission mechanism 424 Closing member 425 Support member 429 Display frame portion 440 Lifting mechanism 443 Production display control means 444 Area displacement control means 448 Window frame 449 First illumination part 460 Second illumination Part 461 Stage 461a Sphere outlet 466 Base member 467 Lower long hole part 468 Upper long hole part 469 Link mechanism 480 Lower support pin 481 Upper support pin 482 Lifting drive means 486 Bottom face part 487 Side wall part 488 Guide part 489 Meter module 500 Pinion 501 Rack 503 Crossing part 504 Transparent cover 530 Special start opening unit 531 Prize winning passage 532 Special prize winning device 534 Inclined surface 535 Receiving guiding member 538 Prize winning device casing 539 Wall 541 Outlet 542 Opening 543 Movable guiding wall 544 Guide portion 545 Front case portion 546 Rear case portion 547 Flange portion 548 Solenoid 549 Plunger 551 Arm member 551a Arm portion 551b Abutting portion 551c Locking portion 552 Support shaft portion 554 Brake gate member 555 Protrusion 557 Mounting hole 558 561 Prize-preventing member 562 Connecting member 601 Normal symbol per-determination random number extraction means 602 Normal symbol success / failure determination means 603 First hold means 604 First hold release means 605 Normal symbol display control means 606 Normal symbol hold display control means 607 Normal winning game execution means 608 Advantageous game execution means 611 Special symbol hit determination random number extraction means 612 Special symbol hit / fail judgment means 613 Second hold means 614 Second hold release means 615 Special symbol display control means 616 Special symbol hold display control means 617 Big hit game execution means 618 Small hit game execution means 620 Command transmission means 621 Ejection determination means 622 Prize determination means 623 Prize ball payout means 630 Command reception means 631 Normal symbol image display control means 632 Special symbol image display Control means 700 State information determination means 702 First modification means 704 State information setting means 706 State information release means 708 Second modification means 710 Production command transmission means 758 Liquid crystal control board 758a Liquid crystal control MPU
758b LCD control ROM
758c VDP
758d Image ROM
763 Sub integrated board 763a Sub integrated MPU
763b Sub-integrated ROM
763c Sound source IC
763d sound ROM
765 Main control board 765a Main control MPU
765b Main control I / O port 769 RAM clear switch 775 Dispensing control board 775a Dispensing control MPU
775b Payout control I / O port 775c External WDT
777 Error LED display 778 Error release switch 779 Ball removal switch 780 Main board 781 Peripheral board 1151 Lottery information display area 1152 Game information display area 1153 Hold corresponding display area 1154 Normal symbol corresponding display area 1155 Special symbol corresponding display area

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area and into which a game ball is driven toward the game area;
Opening and closing that is provided in the game area of the game board and that can be opened and closed between a closed state in which it is difficult to receive a game ball driven toward the game area and an open state in which it is easier to receive a game ball than the closed state Equipment,
A first start port provided in the game area;
A second start port provided in the game area, having a movable member, and allowing a game ball to enter only when the movable member opens and closes;
First start determination means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port;
A lottery for winning the first hit that triggers the operation of the movable member based on the fact that the first start determination means determines that a game ball has entered the first start port. A first lottery means for processing;
When the first winning is won in the lottery process by the first lottery means, drive control of the movable member is performed so that a game ball can enter the second start port. Drive control means;
Second start determination means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port which is allowed to enter by drive control by the drive control means according to the first winning winning. When,
Second lottery means for performing lottery processing for winnings and jackpots based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting port by the second start determining means;
An object game executing means for performing a game per object in which the opening and closing device is opened and closed based on the winning of the object being won in the lottery process by the second lottery means;
Whether or not the game balls entered into the special area among the plurality of receiving areas including the special area and the loss area are distributed when a game ball enters the open / closed opening / closing device. A machine lottery device for performing the lottery of
The game balls entered in the opening / closing device are assigned to the special area among the plurality of receiving areas, and the jackpot is won in the lottery process by the second lottery means; A game machine comprising: a second special game execution means for performing a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the game per game when any one of the conditions is satisfied,
The drive control means includes
Advantageous state starting means for registering advantageous game information indicating that the player is in an advantageous state in response to a predetermined specific condition being satisfied;
Advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous game information is registered in driving control of the movable member;
When it is determined by the advantageous state determination means that the advantageous game information has been registered, the time during which the game ball can enter the second starting port is longer than when the advantageous game information has not been registered. Advantageous control means for controlling the driving of the movable member so that the
Advantageous state ending means for canceling registration of the advantageous game information by the advantageous state starting means in response to the drive control by the advantageous control means being performed a predetermined number of times,
In the lottery process by the second lottery means, one of the bonuses and the jackpot is always won.